manualshive.com logo in svg

NEC ELECTRA ELITE IPK II, Features And Specifications Manual

The NEC Electra Elite IPK II User Manual is your ultimate guide to unlocking the full potential of this powerful telecommunications system. Discover step-by-step instructions, troubleshooting tips, and advanced features, all conveniently available for instant and free download at our website. Maximize your use of this exceptional product today. [Website]

Share
Download
background image

Features and Specifications

i

Preface

Before Reading this Manual

This manual provides detailed information for each of the system’s features. If you are not familiar with 
the features, the Table of Contents provides a list of the features and where to find the feature within 
the manual.

G

ENERAL

 I

NFORMATION

Congratulations! You have purchased the NEC Electra Elite IPK II System.

The Electra Elite IPK II system is a feature-rich key system that provides many features including 
Automatic Call Distribution, Computer Telephony Integration, IP Station and IP Trunk support, ISDN 
compatibility, PBX compatibility, TAPI compatibility, Voice over Internet Protocol and Uniform Call 
Distribution.

The  Electra Elite IPK II system provides the customer needs today, and as business expands the 
system can be expanded to grow as well.

The  Electra Elite IPK II system has a set of manuals that provide all the information necessary to 
install and support the system.  This preface describes these manuals.

S

UPPORTING

 D

OCUMENTS

Electra Elite IPK II General Description Manual 

This Manual provides general information about the system, its features, system configuration and 
standards.  This manual provides an overview of the Electra Elite IPK II system and can be used to 
present information to potential customers.

Electra Elite IPK II System Hardware Manual 

The System Hardware Manual is provided for the system installer.  This manual has detailed 
instructions for installing the Electra Elite IPK II KSU, ETUs, Multiline Terminals, and optional 
equipment. 

Summary of Contents for ELECTRA ELITE IPK II

Page 1: ...ormat changes may occur When viewing and printing this document we cannot guarantee that your specific PC or printer will support all of the fonts or graphics Therefore when you view the document fonts may be substituted and your individual printer may not have the capability to print the document correctly ...

Page 2: ......

Page 3: ...FEATURES AND SPECIFICATIONS MANUAL INT 1072 IPK II DOCUMENT REVISION 1 RELEASE 1000 ...

Page 4: ......

Page 5: ... Inc Dterm is a registered trademark of NEC Corporation and Electra Elite is a registered trademark of NEC America Inc Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation AT T is a registered trademark of American Telephone and Telegraph Company Lucent Technologies is a trademark or service mark of Lucent Technologies Inc Nortel Networks and the Nortel Networks logo are trademarks of Nortel...

Page 6: ......

Page 7: ...m Call Distribution The Electra Elite IPK II system provides the customer needs today and as business expands the system can be expanded to grow as well The Electra Elite IPK II system has a set of manuals that provide all the information necessary to install and support the system This preface describes these manuals SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS Electra Elite IPK II General Description Manual This Manual...

Page 8: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II ii Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual This manual provides instructions for programming the Electra Elite IPK II system using a Multiline Terminal or PC ...

Page 9: ...m 1 1 Chapter 2 Features Section 1 About This Chapter 2 1 Section 2 Important Notes 2 2 Section 3 IPK to IPK II Feature Comparison List 2 3 Section 4 Features 2 10 Account Code Entry 2 11 Account Code Forced Verified Unverified 2 17 Alarm 2 25 Alphanumeric Display 2 29 Analog Communications Interface ACI 2 31 Ancillary Device Connection 2 39 Answer Hold 2 41 Answer Key 2 43 Attendant Call Queuing ...

Page 10: ...Forwarding Off Premise 2 111 Call Forwarding Park and Page 2 123 Call Forwarding with Follow Me 2 127 Call Monitoring 2 131 Call Redirect 2 135 Call Waiting Camp On 2 137 Callback 2 141 Caller ID 2 145 Caller ID Call Return 2 159 Central Office Calls Answering 2 163 Central Office Calls Placing 2 171 Class of Service 2 179 Clock Calendar Display 2 197 CO Message Waiting Indication 2 201 Code Restr...

Page 11: ... 271 Direct Inward Dialing DID 2 285 Direct Inward Line DIL 2 297 Direct Inward System Access DISA 2 303 Direct Station Selection DSS Console 2 315 Directed Call Pickup 2 323 Directory Dialing 2 327 Distinctive Ringing Tones and Flash Patterns 2 331 Do Not Disturb 2 335 Door Box 2 339 Drop Key 2 345 Dterm Cordless II Terminal 2 349 Dterm Cordless Lite II Terminal 2 357 Dterm Handset Cordless 2 361...

Page 12: ...e 2 425 Handsfree and Monitor 2 427 Handsfree Answerback Forced Intercom Ringing 2 431 Headset Operation 2 435 Hold 2 439 Hotel Motel 2 445 Hotline 2 449 Howler Tone Service 2 453 Intercom 2 455 Internal Hub 2 461 IP Station MEGACO IAD Integrated Access Device 2 465 IP Station MEGACO MG 16 2 469 IP Trunk H 323 Protocol 2 485 IP Trunk SIP Session Initiation Protocol 2 487 IPK II In Mail 2 491 IPK I...

Page 13: ...Microphone Cutoff 2 585 Multiline Conference Bridge 2 587 Multimedia Conference Bridge 2 591 Multiple Trunk Types 2 597 Music on Hold 2 607 Name Storing 2 613 Night Service 2 617 Off Hook Signaling 2 625 One Touch Calling 2 629 Operator 2 633 OPX Off Premise Extension 2 635 Paging External 2 637 Paging Internal 2 643 Park 2 647 PBX Compatibility 2 653 PC Programming 2 659 Power Failure Transfer 2 ...

Page 14: ...Number Dialed 2 721 Secondary Incoming Extension 2 725 Secretary Call Buzzer 2 729 Secretary Call Pickup 2 733 Selectable Display Messaging 2 735 Selectable Ring Tones 2 739 Serial Call 2 743 Single Line Telephones Analog 500 2500 Sets 2 745 SLT Adapter 2 751 Softkeys 2 755 Speed Dial System Group Station 2 757 Station Add On Console 2 767 Station Hunt 2 769 Station Message Detail Recording 2 771 ...

Page 15: ...841 Trunk Group Routing 2 851 Trunk Groups 2 855 Trunk Queuing Camp On 2 859 Unified Messaging 2 863 Uniform Call Distribution UCD 2 873 Uniform Numbering Network 2 881 Universal Slots 2 885 User Programming Ability 2 903 Virtual Extensions 2 905 Voice Mail Integration Analog 2 911 Voice Mail Message Indication on Line Keys 2 923 Voice Over 2 927 Voice Over Internet Protocol VoIP 2 931 Voice Respo...

Page 16: ...___________________________________________________ viii Table of Contents ___________________________________________________________________________________ Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 17: ...s of Service Options DISA E M Service Program 20 14 2 193 Table 2 9 Dial Tone Detection Program Interaction 2 268 Table 2 10 Distinctive Ringing Tones and Flash Patterns 2 331 Table 2 11 Electra Elite IPK Telephone Specifications 2 384 Table 2 12 Restrictions for Calling Party Names 2 517 Table 2 13 Keys for Entering Names 2 614 Table 2 14 Hardware Software Requirements for Running PCPro 2 661 Tab...

Page 18: ...mands 2 829 Table 2 26 Maximum Capacities for Basic and Expanded Port Packages 2 885 Table 2 27 Maximum System Capacities for Station Interface ETUs 2 886 Table 2 28 Maximum System Capacities for Trunk Interface ETUs 2 892 Table 2 29 Maximum System Capacities for Application Interface ETUs 2 897 Table 2 30 KSU Power Based Calculator Chart 2 898 Table 2 31 Electra Elite IPK II VoIP Specifications 2...

Page 19: ...ls are available in black or white The large Liquid Crystal Display LCD on the display terminals provides call status data and programming information Terminal line sizes include 8 line 16 line and 32 line IP terminals are available in 4 line 8 line and 16 line with LCD Speakerphone with full handsfree operation and headset jack is standard All are compatible with the AD A R AP A R AP R R CT A R U...

Page 20: ...ed Dial Single On Off Keys Line keys may also be assigned as Single On Off keys in System Programming to toggle a feature on off This assignment has no impact on the Feature Access keys but the assigned features are very specific Call Forward All Call Call Forward Busy No Answer Scrolling CID headset and DND are examples of features available for Single On Off keys One Touch Keys One Touch keys ca...

Page 21: ...ges and an outgoing only Analog SLT Port AD A R is also available The Electra Elite IPK II Single Line Terminals are offered in two variations DTR 1 1 and DTR 1HM 1 Both terminals come in black or white Both have DTMF and Pulse Dialing compatibility and offer Flash and Redial key functionality The Electra Elite IPK II Single Line Terminals come standard with a Message Waiting Indicator that also f...

Page 22: ...rs and lines sizes Terminals are available in black or white The large Liquid Crystal Display LCD on the display terminals provides call status data and programming information Line sizes include 8 line 16 line and 32 line Speakerphone with full handsfree operation and headset jack is standard The Dterm Handset Cordless terminal is a 16 button telephone display only An Attendant Add On DCU 60 1 CO...

Page 23: ...ettings indicates the factory default setting if any System Availability describes multiline terminals that can be used with this feature and lists any additional equipment such as adapters or ETUs that must be installed for this feature to operate Programming lists the memory blocks that support the feature Related Features lists features that are associated with the feature being described e g t...

Page 24: ...on similar to PGM 15 07 or SC nnn This means that the key requires function code nnn and you can program this code through Program 15 07 or by dialing Service Code 751 or 752 Refer to the Programmable Function Keys feature for more information Using Handsfree The manual assumes each extension has Automatic Handsfree This lets a user just press a line key or Speaker key to answer or place a call Fo...

Page 25: ...r Key Answer Key Assigned Night Answer ANA Direct Inward Line DIL Attendant Add On Console Direct Station Selection DSS Console Attendant Camp On Call Waiting Camp On Attendant Positions Attendant Call Queuing Attendant Station Outgoing Lockout Code Restriction Dial Block Attendant Transfer Transfer Authorization Code Code Restriction Override Automated Attendant Voice Response System VRS Automati...

Page 26: ... Forward Busy No Answer Call Forwarding Call Forward Centrex Not Supported Call Forward Display Call Forwarding Call Forward Off Premise Call Forwarding Off Premise Call Forward Split Call Forwarding Call Monitoring Call Monitoring Call Park System Park Call Pickup Group Group Call Pickup Call Pickup Direct Directed Call Pickup Callback Request Message Waiting Caller ID Call Return Caller ID Call ...

Page 27: ...s Not Supported Digital Voice Mail Digital Voice Mail Direct Inward Dialing DID Direct Inward Dialing DID Direct Inward System Access DISA Direct Inward System Access DISA Direct Inward Termination DIT Direct Inward Line DIL Direct Paging Access Paging Internal Direct Station Selection DSS One Touch Calling Distinctive Ringing Distinctive Ringing Tones and Flash Patterns Do Not Disturb DND Do Not ...

Page 28: ...l Access Accommodation Code Restriction External Tone Ringer Analog Communications Interface ACI External Zone Paging Meet Me Paging External Facsimile CO Branch Connection Facsimile CO Branch Connection Feature Access User Programmable Programmable Function Keys Flexible Line Assignment Programmable Function Keys Flexible Numbering Plan Flexible System Numbering Flexible Ringing Assignment Ring G...

Page 29: ...cess Device ISDN BRI Trunk Connections ISDN Compatibility ISDN PRI Trunk Connections ISDN Compatibility I Use Indication Distinctive Ringing Tones and Flash Patterns Key Function Multifunction Registration Multiple Trunk Types Key Common Channel Interoffice Signaling K CCIS K CCIS T1 Large LED Indication Message Waiting Last Number Redial Last Number Redial Least Cost Routing LCR Automatic Route S...

Page 30: ...ne Selection Privacy on All Calls Conference Voice Call Privacy Release Privacy Release Conference Voice Call Privacy Release Private Lines Private Line Programming from Multiline Terminal Programming from Multiline Terminal Pushbutton Dial DTMF or DP Single Line Telephones Analog 500 2500 Sets Quick Transfer to Voice Mail Quick Transfer to Voice Mail Recall Key Flash Recall With Station Identific...

Page 31: ...all Waiting Camp On Station Hunt Station Hunt Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Station Message Detail Recording Station Name Assignment User Programable Station Name Assignment User Programmable Station Outgoing Lockout Code Restriction Dial Block Station Relocation Station Relocation Station Transfer Transfer Step Call Department Step Calling Store and Repeat Memo Dial Stored Hookflash Speed...

Page 32: ...ion UCD Uniform Call Distribution UCD Uniform Numbering Network Uniform Numbering Network Universal Slots Universal Slots Unsupervised Conference Tandem Trunking Unsupervised Conference User Programming Ability User Programming Ability Voice Mail Integration Analog Voice Mail Integration Analog Voice Mail Message Indication on Line Keys Voice Mail Message Indication on Line Keys Voice Over Interne...

Page 33: ...idden from a telephone s display This would prevent for example an unauthorized co worker from obtaining a Verified Account Code by watching the display and making note of the digits that dial out When hidden the Account Code digits show as the character on the telephone display Account Code Capacity Account Codes print along with the other call data on the SMDR record after the call completes Acc...

Page 34: ...ey are hidden on the telephone s display To simplify Account Code entry store the Account Code e g 1234 in a One Touch Key Just press the key instead of dialing the codes Abbreviated Dialing bins can contain stored Account Codes Prevent them from being displayed using 20 07 04 Automatic Route Selection ARS can force a user to enter an Authorization Code prior to using a certain route The system ve...

Page 35: ...ode By default this option is set to 5 Entries 0 64800 seconds 35 05 01 Account Code Setup Account Code Mode For each Class of Service 1 15 use this option to select the Account Code Mode The options are 0 Account Codes disabled Any codes you enter dial out as part of your initial call 1 Account Codes optional not required 2 Account Codes required forced but not verifiable 3 Account Codes required...

Page 36: ...mber If your system has Forced Account Codes you must use this procedure If it has Verified Account Codes you can use this procedure instead of letting the system prompt you for your Account Code You may also use this procedure if your system has Optional Account Codes If your system has Verified Account Codes enabled be sure to choose a code programmed into your Verified Account Code list 1 Acces...

Page 37: ...nk 2 Dial 3 Enter the Account Code You can enter any code of the proper length Incoming Account Codes cannot be Forced or Verified 4 Dial To enter an Account Code while placing a trunk call If your system has Forced Account Codes you must follow this procedure 1 Access trunk for outside call You can access a trunk by pressing a line key or dialing a code Refer to Central Office Calls Placing on pa...

Page 38: ...by dialing a code Refer to Central Office Calls Placing for more information 2 Dial 3 Enter Account Code 1 16 digits 4 Dial 5 Dial number you want to call If you hear stutter dial tone after dialing the number ARS is requesting you to enter an ARS Authorization Code Refer to the Automatic Route Selection on page 2 65 feature for more information on ARS Authorization Codes ...

Page 39: ...ccount Codes do not block emergency assistance 911 calls Once set up in system programming you can enable Forced Account Codes on a trunk by trunk basis In addition Forced Account Codes can apply to all outside calls or just long distance calls Forced Account Codes for Toll Calls restricts calls according to the following chart Number of Digits Dialed If first digit is not 1 If first digit is 1 1 ...

Page 40: ...stem can control the ability of extension users to enter Account Codes for incoming calls When this option is enabled a user can dial while on an incoming call enter an Account Code and then dial to return to their caller If the option is disabled any digits the user dials after answering an incoming call outdial on the connected trunk Hiding Account Codes Account Codes can be optionally hidden fr...

Page 41: ... 20 07 04 Automatic Route Selection ARS can force a user to enter an Authorization Code prior to using a certain route The system verifies the ARS Authorization Code dialed against the ARS Authorization Code list Program 44 03 To simplify Account Code entry store the Account Code e g 1234 in a One Touch Key Just press the key instead of dialing the codes Account Codes appear on the SMDR report eve...

Page 42: ...rced account code is incorrectly entered 21 04 01 Toll Restriction Class Use this option to assign a Toll Restriction Class 1 15 to an extension 35 05 01 Account Code Setup Account Code Mode For each Class of Service 1 15 use this option to select the Account Code Mode The options are 0 Account Codes disabled Any codes you enter dial out as part of your initial call 1 Account Codes optional not re...

Page 43: ...ges Operation To enter an Account Code any time while on a trunk call The outside caller cannot hear the Account Code digits you enter You can use this procedure if your system has Optional Account Codes enabled You may also be able to use this procedure for incoming calls This procedure is not available for single line telephones 1 Dial OR Press your Account Code key PGM 15 07 01 or SC 751 code 5...

Page 44: ...r dialing the number ARS is requesting that you enter an Automatic Route Selection Authorization Code Refer to Automatic Route Selection on page 2 65 for more information To dial an outside number and let your system tell you when a Forced Account Code is required 1 Access a trunk and dial the number you want to call If you hear stutter dial tone after dialing the number ARS is requesting that you...

Page 45: ...he proper length 4 Dial To enter a Forced Account Code at a single line telephone 1 Access trunk for outside call You can access a trunk by dialing a code Refer to Central Office Calls Placing for more information With Forced Account Codes you hear Please enter an Account Code depending on programming 2 Dial 3 Enter Account Code 3 16 digits 4 Dial 5 Dial number you want to call If you hear stutter...

Page 46: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 24 Account Code Forced Verified Unverified THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 47: ...re two types of Alarms J Alarm 1 sounds only once at the preset time J Alarm 2 sounds every day at the preset time Conditions Single line telephones will ring and Music on Hold will be heard when the alarm sounds Only a Multiline Terminal can view what time the alarm is currently set for Default Settings Alarm is enabled System Availability Terminals Any Station Required Component s None Related F...

Page 48: ...arm time 24 hour clock For example for 1 15 PM dial 1315 A confirmation tone will be heard if the alarm has been set If the alarm was not set an error tone will be heard instead 5 At the multiline terminal press Speaker to hang up OR At the single line telephone hang up To silence an alarm 1 At multiline terminal press Exit OR At the single line telephone lift the handset The single line set user ...

Page 49: ...o cancel an alarm 1 At the multiline terminal press the Speaker key OR At the single line telephone lift the handset 2 Dial 727 3 Dial alarm type 1 or 2 4 Dial 9999 5 At a multiline terminal press Speaker to hang up OR At the single line telephone hang up ...

Page 50: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 28 Alarm THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 51: ...lay that provides various feature status messages These messages help the display telephone user process calls identify callers and customize features The contrast is not adjustable when the telephone has background music enabled Conditions None Default Settings Enabled for all display telephones System Availability Terminals All Display Multiline Terminals Required Component s None ...

Page 52: ...lt 678 15 02 01 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Display Language Selection Select the language to be displayed on a multiline terminal display 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class of Service 1 15 to an extension 20 11 08 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Transfer Display In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 an extension s incoming transfer p...

Page 53: ...the music source if desired Extension users can dial the ACI analog port extension number and listen to the connected music source The PGD 2 U10 ADP relay associated with the port closes when the call goes through For Music on Hold connect the music source to the PGD 2 U10 ADP module Connect the music source control leads to the CTL control relay jack Refer to the Electra Elite IPK II Hardware Man...

Page 54: ...U10 ADP to manually or automatically record calls The recording device is typically a customer provided tape recorder You can set up ACI Call Recording to output to a single ACI port recording device or to a pool of ACI ports devices With a single device all calls are stored in a centralized location With a pool of devices you ll be sure to have a port available for recording even in peak traffic ...

Page 55: ...ents who are logged on can be recorded ACI software ports cannot be Background Music music sources An extension cannot have Hotline keys for ACI software ports Music on Hold ACI software ports can be Music on Hold music sources An extension can have One Touch Keys for ACI software ports The gives the extension user J One Touch access to external music J One Touch External Paging J One Touch loud r...

Page 56: ...stallation details Default Settings No PGD 2 U10 ADPs programmed System Availability Terminals None Required Component s PGD 2 U10 ADP PGD 2 U10 ADP ACI Interface Specifications Relay Contacts Maximum Contact Ratings 30 V DC 60 mA 90 V AC 10 mA Minimum Application Load 1 V DC 1 mA Audio Music Input Input Impedance 47 K Ohms 1 K Hz Maximum Input 0 4Vrms or 1 0Vp p Audio Paging Output Output Impedan...

Page 57: ... the pilot number they reach an available ACI software port within the group ACI Groups 1 16 14 09 01 Conversation Recording Destination for Trunks ACI Recording Destination Extension Number Use this option to assign the ACI Call Recording destination on a per trunk basis The destination can be an ACI port s extension number assigned in Program 11 06 01 or an ACI Department Group pilot number assi...

Page 58: ... assigned in Program 11 08 If destinations are assigned in Programs 14 09 and 15 12 the destination in Program 15 12 will be followed 15 12 02 Conversation Recording Destination for Extensions ACI Automatic Recording for Incoming Call Determine whether an extension should be automatically recorded when an incoming call is received 0 Off 1 On 15 12 04 Conversation Recording Destination for Extensio...

Page 59: ...01 01 1 and a music source is connected you hear music OR J If the port is set for output Program 33 01 01 2 and External Paging is connected you can page into the external zone OR J If the port is set for output Program 33 01 01 2 and a loud ringer is connected you activate the loud ringer To manually record a call an ACI software port 1 While on a call press the ACI Conversation Record key PGM 1...

Page 60: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 38 Analog Communications Interface ACI THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 61: ... Terminals DTH 8 1 DTH 8D 1 DTH 16D 1 DTH 32D 1 DTH 16LD 1 Required Component s AD A R AP A R AP R R Conditions The optional device fits underneath the terminal Engineering Technical Information Bulletins ETIs provide connection instructions for the various ancillary devices Ancillary devices that are not covered by an ETI may not be compatible with Electra Elite multiline terminals Verify with NE...

Page 62: ...2 40 Ancillary Device Connection Default Settings None Related Features Electra Elite IPK Terminals Electra Elite Terminal Migration Programming 15 03 01 SLT Signaling Type 15 03 04 Flashing Operation Depends on the connected ancillary device ...

Page 63: ...swered Use Program 15 02 06 Normal Hold Exclusive Hold to set the type of Hold key to be used Default Normal Hold For calls placed in a Park Group the LED will blink fast green For calls placed in a Park Group by another user the LED will blink slow red The Answer Hold feature does not function for incoming internal calls CO PBX incoming calls not assigned to ring or assigned to another ring group...

Page 64: ...ll for DID DISA DIL E M Default COS 01 15 1 Operation To answer a call on a different line key or CAP key with a call in progress 1 Receive a CO PBX DID DISA DIL E M incoming ring The Answer key flashes 2 Press the Answer key and answer the new call The Answer Key LED goes out The original call is put on hold 3 If additional calls are received press the Answer key to place the current call on hold...

Page 65: ...ing until the last unanswered call is answered Press the Answer key during a call to hold the current call and allow the next call to be answered Conditions The Answer key LED functions for incoming CO PBX calls CO PBX transfer camp on calls and transfer camp on Tie DID calls Incoming calls answered by the Answer key are handled first in first out An Internal call internal transfer camp on call CA...

Page 66: ...unk Ring Group Assignment Assign trunks to incoming Ring Groups 22 07 01 DIL Assignment Assign the destination extension or Department Calling Group for each DIL Incoming trunk Operation To answer calls using the Answer key 1 Receive CO PBX incoming ring 2 Press the Answer key 3 Talk with the CO PBX incoming calling party 4 When additional CO incoming calls are received press the Answer key to pla...

Page 67: ...ls would normally stack up for the attendant until they can be processed The 32 call queue total includes Intercom DISA DID DIL tie line and transferred calls If the attendant does not have an appearance for the queued call it waits in line to be answered If the attendant has more than 32 calls queued an extension can Transfer a call to the attendant only if they have Busy Transfer enabled Attenda...

Page 68: ... Features Call Forwarding Programming 20 17 01 Operator s Extension Assign the operator attendant s extension 24 02 01 System Options for Transfer Busy Transfer Prevent 0 or allow 1 extensions to transfer calls to an attendant that has more than 32 calls in queue Operation None ...

Page 69: ...t is out of the normal extension range Automatic Call Distribution operation is further enhanced by ACD Call Queuing When all agents in an ACD Group are unavailable an incoming call will queue and cause the Queue Status Display to occur on the ACD Group Supervisor s display The display helps the supervisor keep track of the traffic load within their group The Queue Status Displays shows J The numb...

Page 70: ...Group to play the Queue Depth only when using the VRS for message The Queue Depth can be played after the 1st Announcement only 2nd Announcement only or after both Announcements Agent Log In and Log Out Services An ACD Agent can log in and log out of their ACD Group While logged in the agent is available to receive ACD Group calls When logged out the agent is excluded from the group s calls The pr...

Page 71: ...tup above ACD will work as follows EXAMPLE Example 1 Log In with AIC 789 and 567 J During Mode Pattern 1 ACD agents will belong to ACD groups 1 2 10 and 16 at the same time J During Mode Patter 2 ACD agents will belong to ACD groups 1 and 10 J During Mode Pattern 3 8 ACD agents will belong to only ACD group 10 Example 2 Log In with AIC 789 567 and 678 J During Mode Pattern 1 ACD agents will belong...

Page 72: ... at a glance which of the group s agents are J Logged onto the group i e in service J Logged out of the group i e out of service J Busy on a call J Placing an Emergency Call to the supervisor J Not available or installed The ACD Supervisor can also use their console for placing and transferring calls just like any other extension user Flexible Time Schedules An ACD Work Schedule lets you divide a ...

Page 73: ...s not answered the agent will need to manually cancel Rest Mode in order to log back into the ACD group With a Rest Mode key programmed on an ACD agent s telephone when the agent is in rest mode the key will be lit If the Rest Mode key is pressed while an agent is on a call the key will flash to indicate a pre Rest Mode status When the current call is finished the agent s telephone will be in rest...

Page 74: ...ork Time The system implements Automatic Work Time for the agent as soon as they hang up their current call This is helpful in applications such as Tech Service groups where follow up paperwork is a requirement for every call When the agent is done with their work they manually return themselves to the ACD Group Hotline Key Shows Agent Status An extension s Hotline keys provide the normal Busy Lam...

Page 75: ...minal can have a Queue Status Display Check programmable function key The multiline terminal user can press this key any time while idle and using the VOL and VOL scroll through the Queue Status Displays of all the ACD Groups The Queue Status Displays shows see the Queue Status Display illustration below N The number of calls queued N The trunk that has been waiting the longest and how long it has...

Page 76: ...When Logged Out of ACD Group When ACD agents are logged out and a call is placed into the ACD queue the telephones of the logged out agents will display the Queue Status and hear the alarm according to the settings defined in system programming Pressing the Queue Status Display Programmable Function key will return the telephone to idle until the timer in Program 41 20 03 expires again Do not use ...

Page 77: ...e Queue Status Display Programmable Function key to view the queue Programmable Wrap up Timer When an agent finishes their call the system automatically starts a wrap up timer and blocks any ACD calls to the agent This gives them time to complete important logs and records before a new call comes in When the timer expires the system returns the agent to the ACD Group to handle new callers MIS The ...

Page 78: ...e extension where the call was transferred becomes available both the extension and the overflow ACD group ring Conditions If defined in Program 22 11 03 DID calls in queue will display the trunk name with the Queue Status feature When Program 12 07 01 is customized an agent s display will not indicate the WAIT ACD LOGIN status however an agent may still log in Conversation Recording is programmed...

Page 79: ... 03 ACD Master number Ringing calls are answered in the following priority 1 Ringing call which has heard the ACD Delayed message 2 Ringing call which has not heard the ACD Delayed message 3 Calls in queue follows ACD overflow priority set in Program 41 14 03 Transferring Trunk Calls to the ACD Pilot Number 1 While on an outside call press the Transfer key 2 Dial the ACD Pilot number 3 Hang up The...

Page 80: ...de AIC up to four digits The ACD LOG IN LOG OUT key lights To log out for single or multiple agent log ins Multiline Terminal All AIC log ins become logged out 1 Press the ACD LOG IN LOG OUT key Program 15 07 01 or SC 752 10 2 Dial 1 to accept OR Press the Speaker key and dial the AIC Log In service code Program 11 13 08 The ACD LOG IN LOG OUT key goes out Single Line Telephone All AIC log ins bec...

Page 81: ...The ACD Log In Log Out key lights Single Line Telephone Follow Steps 1 3 to log in with additional AICs up to three at any time 1 Lift the handset and dial the AIC Log In service code Program 11 13 08 2 Dial the log in code up to 20 digits This step is not required if the ID code is disabled in Program 41 01 02 3 Dial the first Agent Identity Code AIC up to four digits You will hear a confirmation...

Page 82: ... When Logged Out of ACD Group When ACD agents are logged out and a call is placed into the ACD queue the telephones of the logged out agents will display the Queue Status and hear the alarm according to the settings defined in system programming Pressing the Queue Status Display Programmable Function key will return the telephone to idle until the timer in Program 41 20 03 expires again Rest Mode ...

Page 83: ...Call Distribution ACD 2 61 To cancel the manual Rest Mode Multiline Terminal 1 Press the ACD Rest Mode key PGM 15 07 01 or SC 752 13 The ACD Rest Mode key light goes off Single Line Telephone 1 Lift the handset A fast busy is heard 2 Dial 659 3 Hang up ...

Page 84: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 62 Automatic Call Distribution ACD THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 85: ...SDN trunks is provided by the protocol When an outside line is accessed using a dedicated line key the LED associated with the line key goes off when Automatic Release occurs This feature functions while a call is in progress on hold or in a conference This feature applies to all ICM type calls in progress holding or parked When Automatic Release occurs and the telephone is in handsfree mode the S...

Page 86: ...elease Related Features Central Office Calls Answering Central Office Calls Placing Programming 14 02 09 Busy Tone Detection 0 Disable Default 1 Enable 14 02 14 Analog Trunk Data Setup Loop Start Ground Start 0 Loop Start Default 1 Ground Start Operation None ...

Page 87: ... digits and route calls according to pre determined levels When Electra Elite IPK II systems are networked together by Tie lines or K CCIS the networked systems can be called by a system number and a user s extension number just an extension number or by using a trunk access code ARS Feature Summary ARS provides J Call Routing ARS can apply up to 24 digit analysis to every number dialed For progra...

Page 88: ...istance 411 1411 and 555 calls N Emergency 911 calls J Separate Routing for Equal Access 1010XXX Calls Choose different routing for directly dialed 1010XXX 1 and operator assisted 1010XXX 0 Equal Access calls Basic ARS Operation When a user places an outside call ARS analyzes the digits dialed and assigns one of 400 Selection Numbers to the call The Selection Number chosen depends on which digits ...

Page 89: ...RS installed Trunk Queuing automatically queues for the least costly route The system automatically redials the queued call when the extension user lifts the handset Abbreviated Dialing may bypass ARS routing Set up other options for outgoing calls e g unassign line keys adjust gains ARS access key Call Appearance CAP Keys etc Refer to the Dial Tone Detection feature for the specifics on how the s...

Page 90: ...plan does not meet the site requirements use this program to tailor the system numbering to the site 11 09 01 Trunk Access Code Specify the single digit code used to access ARS normally 9 14 05 01 Trunk Groups Program trunks of the same carrier type into the same trunk group 14 07 01 Trunk Access Map Setup Set up the Trunk Access Maps This sets the access options for trunks Trunk Access Maps 1 200...

Page 91: ...ll forward provided the Class of Service for the trunk groups match 0 Disabled COS not compared 1 Enabled COS Match Access 26 02 01 Dial Analysis Table for ARS LCR Dial Enter the digits 16 digits maximum 1 9 0 400 separate entries for the Dial Analysis Table which will be analyzed by ARS LCR This table will be checked after any programmed F Route operations have completed The system will then refe...

Page 92: ... 1 Add a leading 1 if not dialed as part of the initial call This requires at least eight digits in the ARS table Program 26 02 01 H INPA Insert the NPA specified by NPA H DNN Outdial the NN number of digits or execute the code that follows For example D041234 out dials 124 Valid entries are 0 9 Wnn wait nn seconds and P pause Each digits code counts as a digit So for example if a P was added for ...

Page 93: ... 24 digits max 1 9 0 To enter a wild card don t care digit press Line Key 1 to enter an symbol 44 02 04 Dial Analysis Table for ARS F Route Access Dial Tone Simulation Determine if the Dial Tone Simulation is on 1 or off 0 for the Pre Transaction Table for selecting ARS F Route If enabled this option sends dial tone to the calling party once the routing is determined This may be required if the ce...

Page 94: ...oute table 1 500 assign a priority number 1 4 Select whether or not a beep is heard if a lower priority trunk group is used 0 No Beep 1 Beep 44 05 05 ARS F Route Table Gain Table Number for Internal Call For each ARS F Route table 1 500 assign a priority number 1 4 Select the gain table number to be used for internal calls 0 500 44 05 06 ARS F Route Table Gain Table Number for Tandem Connections F...

Page 95: ...sing ARS F Route H The Tandem Gain Table is activated which is assigned in Program 44 05 H The Tandem Gain Table follows the Incoming transmit and Incoming receive settings for incoming line and Outgoing transmit and Outgoing receive settings for the outgoing line For ARS F Route calls the CODEC gains defined in Program 14 01 02 and 14 01 03 are not activated 44 08 01 Time Schedule for ARS F Route...

Page 96: ... 1 At the multiline terminal press idle Speaker key OR At the single line telephone lift the handset You will hear normal Intercom dial tone 2 Dial 9 You will hear a second stutter dial tone 3 Dial the outside number If you hear another stutter dial tone you must enter your extension s ARS Authorization Code ...

Page 97: ...SIE 8 U10 ETUs do not support the PGD 2 U10 ADP When a ESIB 8 U20 ETU is installed without an ESIE 8 U20 ETU installed a PGD 2 U10 ADP installed on ports 1 8 will be recognized but only channel 1 on the PGD 2 U10 ADP is supported Channel 2 is not available When a ESIB 8 U20 ETU has an ESIE 8 U20 ETU installed ESIB E 16 the PGD 2 U10 ADP will have both channels available for Paging Music on Hold Ex...

Page 98: ...re required Related Features Music on Hold Programming 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class of Service 1 15 to an extension 20 13 30 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Background Music For extension Class of Service allow 1 or prevent 0 an extension from turning Background Music on and off Operation To turn Background Music on or off 1 Press idle Speaker key 2 Dial 7...

Page 99: ...Answerback Both Intercom parties must have lifted the handset or pressed the Speaker key With Program 20 13 10 set to 0 a call which has been barged into can be placed on hold by the originator of the outside call Both the outside caller and the extension which barged into the call are placed on hold Caution The use of monitoring recording or listening devices to eavesdrop monitor retrieve or reco...

Page 100: ...ll but only the outside caller is placed in Park The extension which barged into the call is dropped Privacy blocks Barge In attempts Function keys simplify the Barge In operation Default Setting Disabled System Availability Terminals All Stations Required Component s None Related Features Conference Hold Intercom Off Hook Signaling Park Privacy Data Programmable Function Keys ...

Page 101: ...ions Supplementary Service Barge In Initiate In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 Barge In at the initiating extension i e Barge In initiator 20 13 16 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Barge In Receive In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 Barge In at the receiving extension i e Barge In receive 20 13 17 Class of Service Options Supplementary Ser...

Page 102: ...o have expired before you can Barge In 1 Call a busy extension 2 Press Barge In key PGM 15 07 01 or SC 751 34 To Barge in without first calling the busy extension 1 Pick up the handset or press the Speaker key 2 Dial 710 OR Press Barge In key PGM 15 07 01 or SC 751 34 3 Dial busy extension Q The extension user will hear a warning tone Q The DISA user will be rerouted to the defined ring group Q Th...

Page 103: ...f a telephone within a conference call N When a new call is added to the conference an intrusion tone is heard by all parties in the Conference depending on system programming and all display multiline terminals show the joined party If a Conference is not possible Q The extension user will hear a warning tone Q The DISA user will be rerouted to the defined ring group Q The tie line user will hear...

Page 104: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 82 Barge In THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 105: ...o the Compact Flash card on the CPUII U Conditions The battery on the CPUII U ETU should be removed during long term storage but must be installed protection against loss of power just before ETU installation to provide battery backup for System Memory When fully charged the battery retains System Memory for approximately seven years During normal operation the battery is continually recharged usi...

Page 106: ...y System Availability Terminals Not applicable Required Component s None Related Features Battery Backup System Power Programming 90 03 01 Save Data 1 Save Data User Service code 9 Default PRG 11 15 03 to save the Caller ID History from working memory to SRAM Operation None ...

Page 107: ...ime Actual time depends on system configuration traffic conditions and the capacity of the batteries Conditions During normal operation the batteries are continually recharged by a built in charging circuit The B64 U KSU is equipped with batteries for system battery backup External Battery Back can be connected to the system to provide extended time in the event of commercial power outage Refer to...

Page 108: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 86 Battery Backup System Power Related Features Battery Backup System Memory Programming None Operation None ...

Page 109: ...ilable key Conditions A trunk call that is originated or answered at a multiline terminal must appear on a line key The line key can be assigned as the Trunk Key or as a Call Appearance Key A CAP is dynamic because it is used for any trunk call An 8 button multiline terminal can have eight CAP keys that allow the telephone to process all trunks eight trunks at a time Multiline terminals can be ass...

Page 110: ...sion 03 and Call Appearance CAP Key 08 codes can not be programmed on a DSS Console as the system does not allow entry of the additional data required If you have a trunk line key and Call Appearance CAP Key for the same trunk the line key has priority An incoming call rings the trunk line key and when answered the trunk line keys lights not the CAP Key When you access the trunk for an outgoing ca...

Page 111: ... of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Normal Extended Park Determine whether an extension s Class of Service should allow normal or extended Park 0 Normal for 24 01 06 1 Extended for 24 01 07 24 01 02 System Options for Hold Hold Recall Callback Time A call that is parked longer than the programmed interval recalls the extension where it was initially parked 24 01 06 System Options for Hold Pa...

Page 112: ...OR Press the Speaker key and wait for internal dial tone 2 Dial the Trunk Access Code default 9 3 Dial the outside party the Call Appearance key lights Begin your conversation 4 Press the Hold key the Call Appearance key flashes 5 Press the flashing Call Appearance key to retrieve the call To receive an incoming call put it on hold and then retrieve it using a Multiline Terminal 1 Receive CO PBX i...

Page 113: ...al Keys are shared with the Virtual Extensions VE s In virtual extension mode the key acts as a secondary extension Up to 256 CAR VE keys are provided Conditions There are 256 available ports extensions shared between CAR keys and virtual extensions The 256 available ports extensions are assigned on a per extension basis for CAR key mode or virtual extension VE key mode More than one extension can...

Page 114: ...connect 15 01 05 Basic Extension Data Setup Restriction for Outgoing Disable on Incoming Line Enable 1 or disable 0 supervised dial detection for an extension 15 02 21 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Virtual Extension Access Mode Virtual Extension Key Mode 0 DSS default 1 OTG Outgoing 2 Ignore 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys KYxx Key Number 01 32 KY01 03 01 by default 15 08 01 Incoming Vi...

Page 115: ... Virtual Extension 1 Real Extension 20 04 03 System Options for Virtual Extensions Call Arrival CAR Key Delay Interval Delay 10 sec default 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Mode1 Class No 1 default 20 07 10 Class of Service Options Administrator Level Programmable Function Key Programming Appearance Level 1 On default 0 Off 20 10 08 Class of Service Options Answer Service Auto Off Hook Ans...

Page 116: ...ift the handset or press the Speaker key 2 Dial the CAR key s extension or press the Call Arrival CAR Key The operation depends on the setting in PRG 15 02 21 To program a Call Arrival CAR Key on a telephone 1 Press the Speaker key 2 Dial 752 3 Press the key you want to program 4 Dial 03 5 Dial the number of the extension you want to appear on the key 6 Press Hold once for Immediate Ring To set fo...

Page 117: ...te IPK II Document Revision 1 Call Arrival CAR Keys 2 95 9 Dial the mode number in which the key will delay ring 1 Day 1 5 Day 2 2 Night 1 6 Night 2 3 Midnight 1 7 Midnight 2 4 Rest 1 8 Rest 2 10 Press Speaker key ...

Page 118: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 96 Call Arrival CAR Keys THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 119: ...ng trunk calls the Call Timer begins as soon as the user answers the call Conditions The Call Timer starts over each time the call is retrieved from Hold or Park Default Setting Enabled System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals with an LCD Required Component s None Related Features Alphanumeric Display Programming 20 13 36 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Call Duration Ti...

Page 120: ...ons Incoming Call Service Incoming Time Information Display If this option is set to 1 the Incoming Call Time is displayed on the multiline terminals s LCD while the telephone is ringing 21 01 03 Trunk Interdigit Time External The system waits for this timer to expire before starting the Call Timer Operation To time your trunk calls 1 Place a trunk call The timer starts automatically ...

Page 121: ...Me on page 2 127 for more information J Personal Answering Machine Emulation Allows the extension to emulate an answering machine Refer to Voice Mail for more information Call Forwarding will reroute calls ringing an extension including calls transferred from another extension Call Forwarding can also be split allowing internal and external calls to forward to different destinations The extension ...

Page 122: ... The terminal must be in an idle state to enable call forwarding with a Programmable Function Key or receiving dial tone to enable call forwarding with a service code Call Forward for any Extension to Destination can not be set or canceled from a Virtual Extension Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb Override allows for Overriding a Call Forwarding or DND setting at another extension When a call is tran...

Page 123: ...and Virtual Extensions Required Component s None Related Features Call Forwarding Off Premise Call Forwarding with Follow Me Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb Override Central Office Calls Answering Department Calling Direct Station Selection Do Not Disturb Programmable Function Keys Voice Response System VRS ...

Page 124: ...l Forward Both Ring 745 11 11 07 Call Forwarding Follow Me 746 11 11 08 Do Not Disturb 747 11 11 45 Set or Cancel Call Forwarding Immediate Split No Setting 11 11 46 Set or Cancel Call Forwarding Busy Split No Setting 11 11 47 Set or Cancel Call Forwarding No Answer Split No Setting 11 11 48 Set or Cancel Call Forwarding Busy No Answer Split No Setting 11 11 49 Set or Cancel Call Forwarding Both R...

Page 125: ...ons Hold Transfer Service Call Forward Follow Me In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 an extensions ability to set Call Forward with Follow Me 20 11 23 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service CAR VE Call Forward Set Cancel In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 the ability to set and cancel Call Forwarding for a a CAR or Virtual Extension 24 02 03 Syste...

Page 126: ...ker key 2 Dial the Call Forward Busy No Answer Service Code default 744 OR At the multiline terminal only press the Call Forwarding Programmable Function keys PRG 15 07 01 13 or SC 751 Key Code 13 3 Dial 1 Set 4 Dial the destination extension or off premise number 5 Press the Speaker key or hang up Refer to Call Forwarding Off Premise on page 2 111 To cancel Call Forward Busy No Answer at a forwar...

Page 127: ...tion 1 Pick up the handset or press the Speaker key 2 Dial the Call Forward Both Ring Service Code default 745 OR At Multiline Terminal only press the Call Forwarding Programmable Function keys PRG 15 07 01 14 or SC 751 Key Code 14 3 Dial 0 Cancel 4 Press the Speaker key or hang up To set Call Forward Follow Me from the destination station 1 Pick up the handset or press the Speaker key 2 Dial the ...

Page 128: ...d Immediate for any Extension to Destination Service Code Default 790 3 Dial 1 Set 4 Dial the extension number to be forwarded and then the destination number 5 Press the Speaker key or hang up To cancel Call Forward Immediate for any Extension 1 Pick up the handset or press the Speaker key 2 Dial the Call Forward Immediate for any Extension to Destination Service Code default 790 3 Dial 0 Cancel ...

Page 129: ... Service Code default 741 3 Dial 1 Set 4 Dial the destination extension or off premise number 5 Press the Speaker key or hang up Refer to Call Forwarding Off Premise on page 2 111 To cancel Call Forward Immediate at a forwarding station 1 Press the idle Virtual Extension key 2 Dial the Call Forward Immediate Service Code default 741 3 Dial 0 Cancel 4 Press the Speaker key or hang up To set Call Fo...

Page 130: ...I 2 108 Call Forwarding To cancel Call Forward Busy No Answer using a Virtual Extension 1 Press the idle Virtual Extension key 2 Dial the Call Forward Busy No Answer Service Code default 744 3 Dial 0 Cancel 4 Press the Speaker key or hang up ...

Page 131: ...s helpful for example to dispatchers and office managers that always need to get through Conditions None Default Setting Disabled System Availability Terminals Any Station Required Component s None Related Features Programmable Function Keys Programming 11 12 01 Service Code Setup for Service Access Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb Override Customize the Service Code which is to be used for Call For...

Page 132: ...Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb Override code 37 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class of Service 1 15 to an extension 20 13 04 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Call Forwarding DND Override In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 the ability to initiate Call Forwarding DND Override Operation To override an extension s Call Forwarding or Do Not Distur...

Page 133: ...ect Inward Lines 1 J DISA DID and tie line calls to the forwarded extension 1 J Transferred calls 1 Off Premise Call Forwarding does not reroute Call Arrival CAR Keys Call Arrival CAR Keys or Ring Group calls i e trunk ringing according to Ring Group assignments made in Programs 22 04 and 22 05 Conditions CallForwardingOff Premiserequires eitherloopstarttrunks with disconnectsupervisionor ground s...

Page 134: ...mmed in order for the calls to be transferred off premise The outside number Call Forwarding dials can only be a number normally allowed by the forwarded extension s Toll Restriction In systems with a DSP daughter board for VRS callers to an extension forwarded off premise hear Please hold on your call is being rerouted This option can be disabled in PRG 40 10 01 by setting it to disable Default S...

Page 135: ...ll Forward All Service Code default not assigned 11 11 02 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Call Forward Busy Used to assign the Call Forward Busy Service Code default not assigned 11 11 03 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Call Forward No Answer Used to assign the Call Forward No Answer Service Code default not assigned 11 11 04 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation C...

Page 136: ... 11 11 53 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Set or Cancel Call Forward Busy at Destination Station No Split Used to assign the Call Forward Busy for any Extension Service Code default not assigned 11 11 54 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Set or Cancel Call Forward No Answer at Destination Station No Split Used to assign the Call Forward No Answer for any Extension Service C...

Page 137: ...tomatic Trunk Forwarding Destination Customize the service code to be used to set the destination for the Automatic Trunk Forwarding feature default 735 13 01 01 Abbreviated Dialing Function Setup Abbreviated Dialing Auto Outgoing Call Mode Determine if dialing an Abbreviated Dialing number will dial an outside number seizing a trunk as assigned in Program 13 05 or an Intercom number 0 Trunk Diali...

Page 138: ...breviated Dialing Auto Outgoing Call Mode Determine if dialing an Abbreviated Dialing number will dial an outside number seizing a trunk as assigned in Program 13 05 or an Intercom number 0 Trunk Dialing Mode 1 Extension Dialing Mode 13 04 01 Abbreviated Dialing Number and Name Enter the Common and Group Abbreviated Dialing numbers and names which are to be used for Trunk to Trunk Forwarding 14 01...

Page 139: ...l DID programming 22 11 05 DID Translation Table Number Conversion Transfer Destination 1 22 11 06 DID Translation Table Number Conversion Transfer Destination 2 For each DID Translation Table entry 1 2000 specify the first and second Transfer Destinations if the callers receives a busy or no answer action defined in 22 11 04 Destination Options 0 No Setting 1 100 Incoming Group 102 In Skin Extern...

Page 140: ... line telephone lift the handset 2 Dial the Call Forward Access Code default not assigned 3 Dial 0 Cancel To activate Call Forwarding Off Premise Split 1 At a multiline terminal press the Speaker key OR At a single line telephone lift the handset 2 Dial the Call Forwarding Service Code 3 Dial 1 Set 4 Dial 1 Internal or 0 External 5 Dial Trunk Access Code default 9 number 9 2142622000 Trunk access ...

Page 141: ...R At the single line telephone lift the handset Dial 722 2 Dial the Door Box number 1 4 3 Dial the Abbreviated Dialing number where the calls should be forwarded 4 Press the Speaker key or hang up at the single line telephone to hang up To cancel Call Forwarding Off Premise for a Door Box 1 At the Multiline Terminal press the Speaker Key Dial SC 722 OR At a multiline terminal only press Call Forwa...

Page 142: ...ined 4 Select the time mode 1 8 to be defined 5 Press the Exit key 6 Press the Speaker key to hang up Method 2 follows the pre defined destination in Program 24 04 01 Set Automatic Trunk Forwarding The Abbreviated Dial bin must be defined in 13 04 01 in order for the line to forward 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 733 3 Dial trunk port number to be used 001 200 4 Press the Speaker key to hang up Cancel ...

Page 143: ...try or press Speaker to hang up Cancel the Line Forwarding 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 604 3 Dial the Department Group number 01 64 to be defined 4 Select the time mode 1 8 to be defined 5 Press the Exit key 6 Press the Speaker key to hang up Method 2 follows the pre defined destination in Program 24 05 01 Set Automatic Trunk Forwarding The Abbreviated Dial bin must be defined in 13 04 01 in order f...

Page 144: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 122 Call Forwarding Off Premise THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 145: ...ght now but please hold on while I am automatically paged The prerecorded Paging announcement could say John Smith you have a call waiting on your line The incoming caller hears the first message and listens to Music on Hold while the system broadcasts the second message John Smith could then walk to any phone and pick up his call If John doesn t pick up the call the Page periodically repeats Park...

Page 146: ...ing 11 11 58 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Call Forward with Personal Greeting Call forward with Personal greeting VRS Service code setup Default set to 713 11 12 19 Service Code Setup for Service Access Internal Group Paging Service code setup Default set to 701 11 12 20 Service Code Setup for Service Access External Paging External paging access code Service code setup Default set...

Page 147: ...option to enabled or disable splash tone after Paging over an external zone If enabled the system broadcasts a splash tone at the end of an External Paging announcement 40 10 01 Voice Announcement Service Option VRS Fixed Message Enable 1 or disable 0 the system s ability to play the fixed VRS messages such as You have a message 40 10 05 Voice Announcement Service Option Park and Page Repeat Timer...

Page 148: ...ge type 2 All Calls 3 Outside Calls Only 7 Press the Speaker key to hang up or go on hook at the single line telephone To pick up your Park and Page 1 Press the Speaker key or lift the handset at the single line telephone 2 Dial your extension number To cancel your Park and Page 1 Press the Speaker key or lift the handset at the single line telephone 2 Dial 713 3 3 Press the Speaker key to hang up...

Page 149: ...destination extension To reroute calls from the initiating forwarding extension use Call Forwarding Conditions Call Forwarding an extension in a Department Group will prevent that extension from receiving Department Pilot Calls If a Programmable Function key is not defined for Call Forwarding 10 17 the DND key flashes to indicate that the extension is call forwarded Multiple Stations can set Call ...

Page 150: ...Class of Service allow 1 or prevent 0 the setting of Call Forwarding with Follow Me Operation To activate Call Forward Follow Me from a multiline terminal 1 At a multiline terminal other than your own press the Speaker Key and dial Service Code 746 PRG 11 11 07 OR Press the Call Forward Follow Me key PGM 15 07 01 or SC 751 Code 15 2 Dial 1 to set 3 Dial the Extension to Follow The multiline termin...

Page 151: ... line telephone 1 At a single line telephone other than your own lift the handset and dial the Service Code 746 PRG 11 11 07 2 Dial 1 to set 3 Dial the extension to follow To cancel Call Forward Follow Me from your own single line telephone 1 At your single line telephone lift the handset and dial Service Code 746 PRG 11 11 07 2 Dial 0 to cancel 3 Dial 0 Cancel All Forward Follow Me OR Dial the ex...

Page 152: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 130 Call Forwarding with Follow Me THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 153: ... and the extension which is monitoring the call are placed on hold The handset and microphone are muted during Call Monitoring Live Record will not work for Call Monitor calls With Program 20 13 10 set to 1 a call which is being Monitored can be placed on park by the originator of the outside call but only the outside caller is placed in park The extension which is monitoring the call is dropped C...

Page 154: ... All terminals Required Component s None Related Features Intercom Barge In Conference Hold Park Privacy Data Programmable Function Keys Voice Mail Programming 11 12 08 Service Code Setup for Service Access Barge In Determine what the service code should be for an internal party to use the Barge In feature default 710 ...

Page 155: ... of Service Options Supplementary Service Barge In Receive In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 Barge In at the receiving extension i e Barge In receive 20 13 17 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Barge In Tone Display Enable 1 or disable 0 the Barge In Tone If disabled this also turns off the Barge In display at the called extension 20 13 32 Class of Service Option...

Page 156: ... or tie line trunks 1 Dial the extension number of the busy internal party 2 Dial the single digit service code or the service code 710 the access code will change To Call Monitor without Fist calling the busy extension 1 Press the Speaker key or lift handset 2 Dial 710 or press the Barge In key PGM 15 07 or SC 751 34 the access code will change 3 Dial a busy extension If Monitoring is not possibl...

Page 157: ...ng the Call Redirect key the call is transferred allowing you to continue with your current call This feature works with the following types of calls J Normal trunk call J DID J DISA J DIL J E M J ICM The following types of calls cannot be redirected with the feature J ACD J Transferred J Department Group all ring mode J Door Box J Virtual Extension Conditions After pressing the Call Redirect key ...

Page 158: ... for Extensions Assign a Class Of Service 1 15 to an extension 20 11 16 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Call Redirect Enable 1 or disable 0 a multiline terminal user s ability to transfer a call to a pre defined destination such as an operator voice mail or another extension without answering the call Operation To redirect a ringing call 1 With an incoming call ringing your extensio...

Page 159: ...val CAR Key virtual extension keys do not support Call Waiting Camp On Programmable Function keys code 35 If an extension user Camps On and then hangs up the system converts the camp on to a callback If an extension busy on a call has off hook Signaling an incoming Intercom calls rings the idle second line appearance Off Hook Signaling gives an extension the ability to block a caller from dialing ...

Page 160: ... Setup for Service Access Cancel Camp On Customize the Service Code which is to be used for cancelling Camp On default 770 11 12 47 Service Code Setup for Service Access Call Waiting Answer Split Answer for SLT If required use this program to change the code users dial to Split while on a call This code is normally 794 11 16 05 Single Digit Service Code Setup Camp On Customize the1 digit Service C...

Page 161: ...l Time The system cancels an extension s Callback or Trunk Queueing request after this interval default 64800 seconds 20 03 01 System Options for Single Line Telephones The system cancels an extension s Callback or Trunk Queueing request after this interval default 64800 seconds 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class of Service to an extension 1 15 20 09 01 Second Call for DUD DIS...

Page 162: ...on to a trunk refer to Trunk Queuing Camp On on page 2 859 To cancel a Camp On request 1 Hang up 2 At a multiline terminal press the Speaker key and dial 770 OR At a multiline terminal press the Camp On key PGM 15 07 or SC 751 35 OR At the single line telephone lift the handset and dial 770 To Split answer a waiting call at a single line telephone Listen for Camp On beep 1 1 Hookflash or hookflash...

Page 163: ... extension B If caller A does not answer the Callback ring the system cancels the Callback 4 As soon as caller B answers the system sets up an Intercom call between A and B Callback Automatic Answer determines how an extension user answers the Callback ring When Callback Automatic Answer is enabled a user answers the Callback ring when they lift the handset When Callback Automatic Answer is disabl...

Page 164: ... used for SLT Callback Test default 799 11 16 05 One Digit Service Code Setup Camp On If required redefine the service code used to set Camp On default 15 02 11 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Callback Automatic Answer Enable 1 or disable 0 Callback Automatic Answer 15 07 01 Programming Function Keys Assign a function key for Callback code 35 This key is also the Camp On key 20 01 07 System O...

Page 165: ...ave Callback Automatic Answer you automatically place a call to the formerly busy extension when you lift the handset If you do not have Callback Automatic Answer you must press the ringing line appearance to place the call To cancel a Callback 1 At the multiline terminal press the Speaker key and Dial 770 OR At the multiline terminal press Camp On key PGM 15 07 or SC 751 35 OR At the single line ...

Page 166: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 144 Callback THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 167: ...the calling extension s name Caller ID supports the Telco s Called Number Identification CNI and Called Number Delivery CND service when available These services provide the Caller ID information i e messages between the first and second ring burst of an incoming call There are two types of Caller ID message formats currently available Single Message Format and Multiple Message Format With Single ...

Page 168: ...te Log On Protocol with Caller ID digits to the voice mail When a trunk 001 receives the Caller ID as 12345 the protocol becomes 60001 12345 Display Reason for No Caller ID Information With Caller ID enabled the system will provide information for analog calls that do not detect the Caller ID information If the Caller ID information is restricted the telephone display will show PRIVATE If the syst...

Page 169: ...01234567890 20 digits Electra Elite IPK II Wireless Dials 123456 123456789012 Caller ID Sender Queuing Added The Electra Elite IPK II system can provide Caller ID calling party number to a single line telephone which has a display The system can queue incoming calls to the single line telephone if the system Caller ID sender resources are busy Refer to Program 20 19 05 in the Electra Elite IPK II ...

Page 170: ...eviated Dialing or One Touch bins Caller ID can be displayed for incoming calls as well as transferred calls ARS can block outgoing Caller ID information on a call by call basis To do this insert the Caller ID block code e g 67 in the ARS Dial Treatments Trunks with Privacy Release enabled display Caller ID until the call is answered To view it after the call has been picked up press the line key ...

Page 171: ...u shut down the system incoming history data is cleared But you can back up the history data by pressing Speaker 9 Default Setting Disabled System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals with a display and Single Line Telephones equipped to receive Caller ID Required Component s COIB 4 U ETU in COID mode COIB 8 U ETU in COID mode BRT 4 U 20 ETU with Firmware 3 00 or higher DTI U40 ETU with ...

Page 172: ...required to place an outgoing call 8 digits maximum 0 9 This is the code that will be added to the Caller ID information for incoming trunk calls to allow the call to dial out if allowed in 20 19 03 IMPORTANT Program 10 02 05 is only supported by telephone programming PCPro and WebPro cannot edit this option 10 09 01 DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit Setup Allocate the circuits 1 16 or 1 64 on the CPUII ...

Page 173: ...s option is set to 1 the system will suppress ringing and lamping for trunk calls for the first ring in order to receive the Caller ID information Trunks 1 200 14 02 16 Analog Trunk Data Setup Caller ID Type Select the type of Caller ID signal from an analog trunk FSK 0 or DTMF 1 By default this option is set to 0 FSK Trunks 1 200 15 02 08 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Automatic Handsfree U...

Page 174: ...ions Incoming Call Service Caller ID Display In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 the extension s ability to display incoming Caller ID name number information This is disabled at default 20 09 04 Class of Service Options Incoming Call Service Notification of Incoming Call List Existence Determine whether or not the CHECK LIST message is displayed to indicate a missed call 0 Of...

Page 175: ...eives a call which is classified as a private call 20 20 02 Message Setup for Non Caller ID Data Out of Service Area Enter the text up to 24 alphanumeric characters to be displayed for Caller ID when a user receives a call which is classified as a an out of service area call 20 20 03 Message Setup for Non Caller ID Data Call Information with Error Enter the text up to 24 alphanumeric characters to...

Page 176: ...ncoming date and time STA Store in Station Speed Dial bin SYS Store in System Speed Dial bin 5 Press the STA or SYS Softkey The display shows 6 Dial the Abbreviated Dial bin in which the number is to be stored If you press Hold the next available Abbreviated Dial bin will be used The display shows If all Abbreviated Dial bins are used the display shows TABLE IS FULL 7 Press HOLD The display shows ...

Page 177: ...s A C a c 2 3 Enter characters D F d f 3 4 Enter characters G I g i 4 5 Enter characters J L j l 5 6 Enter characters M O m o 6 7 Enter characters P S p s 7 8 Enter characters T V t v 8 9 Enter characters W Z w z 9 0 Enter characters 0 ô Õ ú ä ö ü α ε θ Enter characters B E σ S Accepts an entry only required if two letters on the same key are needed ex TOM Pressing again Space In system programmin...

Page 178: ... mm dd hh mm incoming date and time STA Store in Station Speed Dial bin SYS Store in System Speed Dial bin 5 Press the STA Softkey The display shows 6 Press the One Touch key in which the number is to be stored or dial 1 9 0 If you press Hold the next available One Touch key will be used The display shows If all One Touch keys are used the display shows TABLE IS FULL 7 Press Hold The display shows...

Page 179: ...he list is displayed 2 Press the ARROW DOWN Softkey to scroll through the list of numbers in memory 3 Press the DEL Softkey to delete the entry and scroll to the next entry 4 The Call History key will remain on as long as entries remain in memory 5 To place a call back to a number in the temporary memory list with the number to be dialed displayed press a line or Speaker key Refer to Table 2 1 Key...

Page 180: ...n next to the call record number in the left hand corner this indicates that it is a call you missed unanswered The second row shows the date and time of the call Press the up and down softkeys to see the list of calls available in the buffer 3 If the Caller ID includes a name you can press the HELP key to view the number of the caller 4 To call the displayed number press a line Call Appearance CA...

Page 181: ...Return Call is accessible to a subscriber using Softkeys in Softkey mode or using DTMF in voice conversation Mode One minute before disconnecting the original caller voice mail plays a warning prompt and immediately before disconnecting plays a prompt to indicate that it is returning to the subscriber mailbox When a subscriber listens to a message from a Softkey equipped telephone and Caller ID in...

Page 182: ...tions The enhanced Caller ID is enabled by setting CID 0 0 on the Integration Options line of Easymade Switch Setup Screen Page 1 When Caller ID is already enabled on a system that is updated the CID X Y setting must be changed to CID 0 0 Only one CID setting is allowed on this line The Return Call parameter must be entered on the Integration Options line of Easymade Switch Setup Screen Page 1 to ...

Page 183: ...cument Revision 1 Caller ID Call Return 2 161 System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals Required Component s VMS 2 4 8 U ETU FMS 2 4 8 U ETU VMP 2 4 8 U Related Features Voice Mail Programming None Operation None ...

Page 184: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 162 Caller ID Call Return THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 185: ... the trunk number or dial any other codes to pick up the ringing trunk You will normally set up Universal Answer along with Universal Night Answer refer to Night Service on page 2 617 When a Universal Night Answer call rings the External Paging an employee can answer the call from the first available telephone You might also want to use Universal Answer in a noisy warehouse or machine shop where t...

Page 186: ...oming and outgoing CO calls after a set time period Using the Warning Tone for Long Conversation feature allows users on outgoing calls to hear a warning tone prior to the call disconnecting Line keys and Call Appearance CAP Keys simplify answering outside calls If the Absent text message has been set by the originating extension the destination extension will display the assigned text message ins...

Page 187: ...Forwarding Directed Call Pickup Direct Inward Dialing DID Direct Inward Line DIL Direct Inward System Access DISA Do Not Disturb Group Call Pickup ISDN Compatibility Line Preference Long Conversation Cutoff Night Service Universal Night Answer Programmable Function Keys Selectable Display Messaging Warning Tone for Long Conversation ...

Page 188: ...e Selection for Multiline Terminals Select the service code which can be used at an extension to change the displayed language on a multiline terminal s display default 678 11 12 30 Service Code Setup for Service Access Specified Trunk Answer If required redefine the service code used to answer a specific trunk which is either ringing or on hold default 672 14 01 02 Basic Trunk Data Setup Transmit...

Page 189: ... this option is set to 1 enabled lamping is determined by the setting of Program 22 01 01 Incoming Call Priority If set to trunk priority 1 the Hotline key will lamp solid when a trunk call rings in If set to intercom priority 0 the Hotline key will not lamp for incoming trunk calls but will lamp solid for intercom calls 15 03 03 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup Terminal Type Enter 1 for thi...

Page 190: ...r Outgoing Calls Supervise Dial Detection Timer With the Outgoing Disable on Incoming Line feature if dial tone is not detected after the extension answers an incoming line the system determines the call is unable to complete and releases the DTMF receiver 0 64800 seconds 21 01 17 System Options for Outgoing Calls Restriction Digit in Outgoing Disable on Incoming Line With the Outgoing Disable on ...

Page 191: ... Group The incoming ring group assignment programmed in 41 03 01 overrides the setting in this program 22 06 01 Normal Incoming Ring Mode Indicate whether the trunks in the Ring Group assigned in 22 04 01 should ring 1 or not ring 0 22 07 01 DIL Assignment Assign the destination extension for each DIL incoming trunk 001 200 For this selection to work set 22 02 01 to 4 DIL 22 08 01 DIL IRG No Answe...

Page 192: ...trunk or analog trunk Operation To answer an incoming trunk call 1 Lift the handset To use Universal Answer to answer a call ringing over the Paging system 1 Go off hook Depending on system programming this may answer the call and you can skip Step 2 2 Dial 0 If you hear error tone your extension s Class of Service prevents Universal Answer To listen to the incoming trunk ring choices 1 Press the ...

Page 193: ...There are 200 available trunks Trunk Port Disable The system provides a service code default 645 which can be used by an extension user to block a trunk for outgoing calls The user which busied out the trunk will still have access to it All other users will be blocked from seizing it to place an outgoing call The trunk however can still be answered by any users programmed with the trunk access Sid...

Page 194: ... period Using the Warning Tone for Long Conversation feature allows users on outgoing calls to hear a warning tone prior to the call disconnecting An extension s Toll Class of Service may prevent them from dialing certain numbers Default Setting Enabled System Availability Terminals All Multiline terminals Required Component s Any Trunk ETU i e COI 4 8 COID 4 8 DID DTI etc Related Features Alphanu...

Page 195: ...p for System Administrator Trunk Port Disable Define the service code which should be used by an extension user to block a trunk from being used for outgoing calls Default 645 11 11 13 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Display Language Selection for Multiline Terminal Select the service code which can be used at an extension to change the displayed language on a multiline terminal s dis...

Page 196: ...Select loop start 0 or ground start 1 for the trunk 14 05 01 Trunk Groups Assign trunks to Trunk Groups You can also assign the outbound priority for trunks within the group When users dial up the trunk group they seize the trunks in the order you specify in the outbound priority entry Trunks 1 200 Trunk Groups 1 100 At default all group are assigned to Trunk Group 1 14 06 01 Trunk Group Routing S...

Page 197: ...e this option to enable 1 or disable 0 disconnect supervision for the system trunks 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class Of Service 1 15 to extensions 20 07 12 Class of Service Options Administrator Level Trunk Port Disable For each Class of Service 1 15 enable 1 or disable 0 an extension s ability to use the Trunk Port Disable feature 20 08 02 Class of Service Options Outgoing ...

Page 198: ...m Options for Transfer Trunk to Trunk Transfer Release Warning Tone This timer will start when a trunk begins talking with another trunk e g trunk to trunk transfer outgoing from trunk Tandem Trunking 0 64800 seconds Assign the time before a Trunk to Trunk call will be disconnected 82 08 01 Sidetone Volume Setup Use this program to adjust of the multiline terminal side tone volume There are two le...

Page 199: ...the number OR 1 At the multiline terminal press line key PGM 15 07 01 or SC 752 001 to 200 2 Dial the number To Busy Out a Trunk from Outbound Usage 1 Press Speaker 645 Trunk Number 001 200 1 The user which busied out the trunk will still have access to it All other users will be blocked from seizing it to place an outgoing call The trunk however can still be answered by any users programmed with ...

Page 200: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 178 Central Office Calls Placing THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 201: ...nighttime operation and even during lunch breaks An extension s Class of Service can be changed in system programming or via a Service Code normally 677 There are 15 available Classes of Service Conditions Before assigning a new COS make sure the new COS matches the old COS or you may enable options which the extension should not have or remove options which it should have An extension can have a ...

Page 202: ...ically block another extension s attempt to change their Class of Service via Service Code 677 Program 20 13 28 0 J The default Service Code for this option is 677 Program 11 11 24 677 System Availability Terminals All Stations Required Component s None Related Features Night Service Universal Night Answer Programming 11 11 24 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Change Extension Class of ...

Page 203: ... on Hold Tone Turn off or on an extension s ability to change the Music on Hold tone 0 Off 1 On 0 1 11 10 02 03 Time Setting Turn off or on an extension s ability to set the Time via Service Code 728 0 Off 1 On 1 1 11 10 03 04 Storing Speed Dialing Entries Turn off or on an extension s ability to store System or Group Abbreviated Dialing numbers 0 Off 1 On 1 1 11 10 04 05 Set Cancel Automatic Trun...

Page 204: ...eral Message Record Turn off or on an extension s ability to dial Service Code 612 and record listen to or erase the General Message 0 Off 1 On 0 1 11 10 22 16 Not Used 17 Not Used 18 SMDR Printout Accumulated Extension Data 0 Off 1 On 0 1 11 10 23 19 SMDR Printout Accumulated STG Data 0 Off 1 On 0 1 11 10 24 20 SMDR Printout Accumulated Account Code Data 0 Off 1 On 0 1 11 10 25 21 Electra Elite I...

Page 205: ... On 1 1 11 12 10 04 Group Abbreviated Dialing 0 Off 1 On 1 1 11 12 11 05 Dial Number Preview Turn off or on an extension s ability to use Dial Number Preview 0 Off 1 On 1 1 06 Toll Restriction Override Turn off or on Toll Restricting Override Service Code 663 0 Off 1 On 0 0 21 01 07 21 07 11 11 36 07 Repeat Redial Turn off or on an extension s ability to use Repeat Redial 0 Off 1 On 1 1 08 Toll Re...

Page 206: ...bility to automatically block outgoing Caller ID information when a user places a call If this option is on the system automatically inserts the Caller ID block code 67 defined in Program 14 01 21 before the user s dialed digits 0 Off 1 On 0 0 14 01 20 14 01 21 16 Display E911 Dialed Extension Name and Number Turn off or on an extension s ability to display the name and number of the extension tha...

Page 207: ...0 Off 1 On 0 0 02 Caller ID Display Turn off or on the Caller ID display at an extension 0 Off 1 On 0 0 03 Sub Address Identification Define whether an extension displays the Caller Sub Address 0 Off 1 On 0 0 04 Notification for Incoming Call List Existence Determine whether an extension s display will show Check List when an incoming call has been missed by a user 0 Off 1 On 0 0 20 09 02 05 Setti...

Page 208: ...ion s ability to pick up a call ringing into a Pickup Group Service Codes and 756 0 Off 1 On 1 1 05 Directed Call Pickup for Own Group Turn off or on Directed Call Pickup for calls ringing an extension s own Pickup Group Service Code 756 0 Off 1 On 1 1 06 Meet Me Conference and Paging Turn off or on an extension s ability to use Meet Me Conference and Paging 0 Off 1 On 1 1 07 Automatic Answer of U...

Page 209: ...w Me Turn off or on an extension s ability to initiate Call Forwarding with Follow Me 0 Off 1 On 1 1 06 Unscreened Transfer Turn off or on an extension s ability to use Unscreened Transfer 0 Off 1 On 1 1 07 Transfer Without Holding Turn off or on an extension s ability to use Transfer Without Holding 0 Off 1 On 0 0 08 Transfer Information Display Turn off or on an extension s incoming Transfer pre...

Page 210: ...er s ability to set Trunk to Trunk Forwarding for a Department Group 0 Off 1 On 1 1 18 No Recall Allow 0 or deny 1 answered Transferred calls from recalling the originating extension 0 Off Allow 1 On Deny 0 0 19 Normal Extended Park Determine if an extension s Class of Service should allow either a normal or extended Park 0 Off Normal 1 On Extended 0 0 20 No Callback Turn off or on an extension s ...

Page 211: ... use Long Conversation Cutoff for incoming calls 0 Off 1 On 0 0 03 Long Conversation Cutoff Outgoing Turn off or on an extension s ability to use Long Conversation Cutoff for outgoing calls 0 Off 1 On 0 0 04 Call Forwarding DND Override Turn off or on an extension s ability to use Call Forwarding DND Override 0 Off 1 On 1 1 05 Intercom Off Hook Signaling Turn off or on an extension s ability to re...

Page 212: ...n 1 1 14 Department Calling Turn off or on an extension s ability to call a Department Group 0 Off 1 On 1 1 15 Barge In Initiate Turn off or on Barge In at the initiating extension 0 Off 1 On 0 0 16 Barge In Receive Turn off or on Barge In at the receiving extension 0 Off 1 On 0 0 17 Barge In Tone Display Use this option to turn off or on the Barge In tone If on callers hear an alert tone and thei...

Page 213: ... used 0 Off 1 On 0 0 26 Group Listen Turn off or on an extension s ability to use Group Listen 0 Off 1 On 1 1 27 Busy on Seizing Virtual Extension If set to 1 you can call a busy extension which is talking on a virtual extension key Program 20 13 06 Call Waiting must be set to off for this option to work 0 Off 1 On 1 1 28 Allow Class of Service to be Changed Turn off or on the ability of an extens...

Page 214: ...g In an extension s Class of Service turn off or on an extension s ability to use the Headset ringing 0 Off 1 On 0 0 39 ACD Queue Status Display Turn off or on the ACD Queue Status Display for an extension s Class of Service Any extension which has this option enabled will also hear the queue alarm 0 Off 1 On 0 0 40 Do Not Disturb This option will allow or prevent the user from being able to use t...

Page 215: ... s ability to use the system s System Speed Dialing 0 Off 1 On 0 0 05 Operator Calling This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller s ability to dial 0 for the telephone system operator 0 Off 1 On 1 1 06 Internal Paging This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller s ability to use the telephone system s Internal Paging 0 Off 1 On 1 1 07 External Paging This option enabl...

Page 216: ...value unchanged 6 Enter the Midnight 1 Mode Class of Service for the extension you selected in step 3 and press Hold You see MODE4 nn Press HOLD to leave the current value unchanged 7 Enter the Rest 1 Mode Class of Service for the extension you selected in step 3 and press Hold You see MODE5 nn Press HOLD to leave the current value unchanged 8 Enter the Day 2 Mode Class of Service for the extensio...

Page 217: ...the current value unchanged 10 Enter the Midnight 2 Mode Class of Service for the extension you selected in step 3 and press Hold You see MODE8 nn Press HOLD to leave the current value unchanged 11 Enter the Rest 2 Mode Class of Service for the extension you selected in step 3 and press Hold You see Enter Station 12 Go to step 3 and enter another extension number OR Press the Speaker key to hang u...

Page 218: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 196 Class of Service THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 219: ...gain time Conditions The system retains the Clock Calendar Display after a power failure or system reset Changing the time may change the current Class Of Service COS service depending on the COS mode setup You can program the system to automatically switch modes Single line telephones cannot set the time and date Changing the system time automatically changes the In Mail time Default Setting Enab...

Page 220: ...n Mail Programming 10 01 01 Time and Date Year Enter two digits 00 99 for the year 10 01 02 Time and Date Month Enter two digits 01 12 for the month 10 01 03 Time and Date Day Enter two digits 01 31 for the day 10 01 04 Time and Date Week Enter the digit 1 Sunday 7 Saturday to indicate the day of the week 10 01 05 Time and Date Hour Enter two digits 00 23 for the hour 10 01 06 Time and Date Minute...

Page 221: ...s Setup Start of Week Day Enter the day of the week the system should adjust the time for daylight savings time 01 Sunday 02 Monday etc 10 24 06 Daylight Savings Setup End of Month Enter the month of system should adjust the time for standard time 01 12 10 24 07 Daylight Savings Setup End of Week Enter the week of the month the system should adjust the time for standard time 0 Last Week of the Mon...

Page 222: ... other programs in 99 01 xx should be adjusted Leave all other entries at their default setting This program is only available through telephone programming 0 No adjustment default 1 127 seconds to be added to clock 128 255 seconds to be backed up on the clock 128 to 1 seconds Operation The date must be set in system programming 10 01 To set the system Time 1 Press the Speaker key 2 Dial 728 3 Dia...

Page 223: ...nce line key is used by other ports during green blink flutter the line key becomes in use and LED is turned on red When the station is using a DTH 16LD telephone flashes on the LCD of a Direct Trunk appearance line key to indicate a new message is stored in the CO voice mail system A local Voice Mail system and this feature can be supported in the same system When power outage or some other reaso...

Page 224: ...kup System Power Digital Voice Mail Message Waiting Speed Dial System Group Station Voice Mail Integration Analog Programming 15 17 01 CO Message Waiting Indication LED Flash Assignment Assign the Station and Trunk used for CO ñ Message Waiting Indication default Not Assigned Off 0 On 1 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class of Service 1 15 for the appropriate extensions using the...

Page 225: ... Trunk port number to the System Speed Dial Bin No 0000 1999 default 1999 20 02 08 System Options for Multiline Telephones LCD Display Holding Time This timer determines how long a user display will show Caller ID for a second incoming call default 5 sec Operation To program the CO Message Waiting Callback Speed Dial Bin from an Attendant Position 1 Press the Feature key 2 Dial 28 3 Press the CO l...

Page 226: ... To retrieve a Central Office Message Waiting Indication 1 Press the Feature key 2 Dial 27 3 Press the CO line key The LCD will indicate ERROR if the CO Line is not flashing for a CO Message Waiting 4 Listen to the message The operation for deletion is based on the remote voice mail system 5 Hang up To clear the Central Office Message Waiting Indication from an Attendant Position 1 Press the Featu...

Page 227: ... will cause a problem when dialing 911 Since it is only a 3 digit number the call will not have a talk path preventing the emergency dispatcher from hearing the caller It is recommended that this option be kept at its default setting of 0 to prevent any problems with dialing 911 Common Permit Code Table Use the Common Permit Code Table when you have numbers you want all Code Restriction Classes to...

Page 228: ... lets you limit the international calls an extension user may dial You can build a restrict table to prevent only certain calls or you can build a permit table to allow only certain calls To allow most international calls use the International Call Restrict Table To prevent most international calls use the International Call Allow Table The system provides 10 International Call Restrict tables wit...

Page 229: ...ill follow the setting in 21 05 13 Code Restriction Class Restriction of Tie Line Calls to determine whether or not the Code restriction setting in Program 34 08 is to be followed If this option is set to 1 the system will follow the system Code restriction settings defined in Program 21 05 01 through 21 05 13 A user can temporarily override a extension s Code Restrictions The system will allow or...

Page 230: ... 01 08 Basic Trunk Data Setup Toll Restriction For each trunk enter 1 to enable Toll Restriction enter 0 to disable Code Restriction 15 02 30 Multi Line Telephone Basic Data Setup Select Toll Restriction Class VE or Real Extension 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions For each extension assign a Class of Service 1 15 20 08 02 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Trunk Calls For each C...

Page 231: ...ns for Outgoing Calls Supervise Dial Detection Timer With the Outgoing Disable on Incoming Line feature if dial tone is not detected after the extension answers an incoming line the system determines the call is unable to complete and releases the DTMF receiver 0 64800 seconds 21 01 17 System Options for Outgoing Calls Restriction Digit in Outgoing Disable on Incoming Line With the Outgoing Disabl...

Page 232: ...tercom Call Restriction For the Toll Restriction Class you select enable 1 or disable 0 Intercom Call Restriction If enabled extensions cannot place or receive Intercom calls 21 05 12 Toll Restriction Class PBX Call Restriction For the Toll Restriction Class you select enable 1 or disable 0 PBX Call Restriction 21 05 13 Toll Restriction Class Restriction of Tie Line Calls Select whether or not the...

Page 233: ...restriction class for trucks For each truck assign a Class restriction Class for each Day Night Service Mode 34 01 05 E M Tie Line Basic Setup System Toll Restriction Enable 1 or disable 0 the ability for tie line calls to follow the system Toll Restriction entries in Programs 21 05 01 through 21 05 13 If disabled Tie Line Code Restriction will be determined by 21 05 13 34 08 01 Toll Restriction D...

Page 234: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 212 Code Restriction THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 235: ... code the extension user can not release it Important This function works by password and Class of Service control the supervisor is not an assigned extension If Dial Block is available for all Classes of Service everyone may become a supervisor if they know the Dial Block password Conditions If the system is reset by a first initialize the Dial Block feature is cleared This feature is not availab...

Page 236: ...on Dial Block Enable 1 or disable 0 an extension s ability to use Dial Block 21 09 01 Dial Block Setup Code Restriction Class with Dial Block Assign a Code Restriction COS 1 15 when the Dial Block feature is used 21 09 02 Dial Block Setup Supervisor Password Assign a 4 digit password to be used by the supervisor to enable or disable Dial Block for other extensions 21 10 01 Dial Block restriction C...

Page 237: ...1 At the multiline terminal press the Speaker key OR At the single line telephone lift the handset 2 Dial 600 3 Dial the 4 digit Dial Block code 4 Dial 0 Confirmation tone is heard 5 Press the Speaker key or replace the handset to hang up To set Dial Block from another extension 1 At the multiline terminal press the Speaker key OR At the single line telephone lift the handset 2 Dial 601 default 3 ...

Page 238: ...r extension 1 At the multiline terminal press the Speaker key OR At the single line telephone lift the handset 2 Dial 601 3 Dial the 4 digit Dial Block code 4 Dial the extension number to be released from Dial Block 5 Dial 0 Confirmation tone is heard 6 Press the Speaker key or replace the handset to hang up ...

Page 239: ...a different Code Restriction Override code to each extension Or extensions can share the same override code Code Restriction Override will override all Code Restriction programming Walking Code Restriction allows you to assign a Code Restriction level for each user When a call is placed using Walking Code Restriction the restriction for the call is based on the Code Restriction level defined in Pr...

Page 240: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 218 Code Restriction Override Related Features Central Office Calls Placing Code Restriction Station Message Detail Recording Voice Response System VRS ...

Page 241: ... be changed from the default setting of 663 In Program 21 14 01 assign a table with the 6 digit user ID dialed to override the Toll Restriction In Program 11 11 36 change the service code to the desired entry Yes In Program 21 14 02 for each table assign the Toll Restriction Class of Service to be used when a user dials the 6 digit ID assigned in 21 14 01 No Stop ...

Page 242: ...s Program 20 08 06 enter 1 Yes In Program 21 01 07 determine how long the system should remove Toll Restriction from the extension In Program 21 07 01 for each extension number set the 4 digit password a user dials to override the Toll Restriction Stop Program 20 08 06 enter 0 No Should the Temporary Toll Restriction Override service code be changed from the default setting of 775 No Yes In 11 11 ...

Page 243: ...s the system removes Toll Restriction for this interval 21 07 01 Toll Restriction Override Password Setup Assign Toll Restriction Override codes to extensions Each code must be 4 digits long using any combination of 0 9 and Each extension can have a separate code or many extensions can share the same override code 21 14 01 Walking Toll Restriction Password Setup User ID Enter the Walking Toll Rest...

Page 244: ... will hear error tone if you dial your code incorrectly 4 Press idle line key or dial trunk access code 5 Dial the number without any restriction To use your Walking Code Restriction level at an extension You can override restriction for only one call at a time 1 At the multiline terminal press the Speaker key OR At the single line telephone lift the handset 2 Dial 663 and dial the 6 digit Walking...

Page 245: ...ern office productivity with Personal Computer Interface PCI PC Dialing Use a CTA or CTU Adapter installed in your multiline terminal as a Personal Computer Interface Installing the TAPI software driver and TAPI compatible software in your personal computer will allow your PC to operate your telephone The TAPI software driver provides all TAPI Basic Services and a host of TAPI Supplemental Service...

Page 246: ...CTI Applications Related Features TAPI Compatibility See this feature for the details on TAPI services provided by the system and the TAPI driver Programming Refer to the Electra Elite IPK II System Hardware Manual for details on connecting the CTA and CTU Adapters Operation None ...

Page 247: ...ding Call Arrival CAR Keys virtual extensions do not support Conference Programmable Function keys nor can they be used to add a call to a Conference Split allows a user to alternate i e switch between their callers in Conference This will allow a dispatcher for example to control a telephone meeting between themselves a customer and a service technician The dispatcher can meet together with all p...

Page 248: ...e outgoing call options for each trunk and user Set up a Conference with a co worker in your immediate work area DISA and tie line users may use the Barge In feature on a Conference call if they know the service code and are permitted in their DISA Tie Line Class of Service Meet Me Conference lets an extension user set up a Conference via Paging Meet Me Paging lets an extension user set up a two p...

Page 249: ...1 12 58 Service Code Setup for Service Access Transfer Into Conference If required change the service code used to transfer a call into a Conference call default 624 11 16 02 Program 11 16 One Digit Service Code Setup Barge In If required use this program to define the single digit service code users dial to Barge In to a Conference call 14 01 04 Basic Trunk Data Setup Transmit Gain Level for Conf...

Page 250: ...e 1 or disable 0 the extension s ability to Barge In to a call 20 13 16 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Barge In Receive In an extension s COS enable 1 or disable 0 the extension s ability to receive a Barge In on a call 20 14 11 Class of Service Options For DISA E M DISA Tie Trunk Barge In Determine if DISA and tie trunk users should have the ability to dial a service code to Barge...

Page 251: ... If the voice mail answers there is no way to drop that extension out You will need to drop the Conference call 5 Repeat steps 2 4 to add more parties Single Line Telephone 1 Establish Intercom or trunk call 2 Hookflash and dial 1 3 Dial extension you want to add OR Access trunk call OR Retrieve call from Park orbit 4 Hookflash and repeat step 3 to add more parties OR Hookflash twice to set up the...

Page 252: ... To Barge In to Conference Call 1 Pick up the handset or press Speaker and dial the service code default 710 If the telephone does not have the proper COS a warning tone is sent After the user hangs up the system will automatically place a Callback to the extension 2 Dial the extension number or press a DSS key of a telephone within a Conference call When a new call is added to the conference an i...

Page 253: ...pearance CAP Key or hang up and the call will recall the extension When the call is transferred into the Conference an intrusion tone is heard by all parties in the conference depending on the entries in Program 20 13 17 and Program 80 01 and all display multiline terminals will show the joined party To cancel the transfer press the flashing line or Call Appearance CAP Key to retrieve the call 4 H...

Page 254: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 232 Conference THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 255: ...rivacy Mode Toggle Option The Privacy Mode Toggle option allows an extension user to quickly change an outside call from the non private mode to the private mode If the outside call is on a line key the user just presses the line key to switch from non private mode to private mode For systems using the Privacy Mode Toggle option trunks initially have the privacy released The remainder of the call ...

Page 256: ...that not all have been assigned as conversation record circuits 14 01 19 Basic Trunk Data Setup Privacy Mode Toggle Option Determine if a trunk should be able to be toggled to a private non private line 0 Disabled 1 Enabled This option is not required for Voice Call Conference 15 07 01 Programming Function Keys Assign a function key for the users to set up Voice Call Conference code 32 and line ke...

Page 257: ...xtension users and the outside caller hear the tone Note that this option is also used for Barge In 31 01 04 System Options for Internal External Paging Privacy Release Time Set the interval users have to join a Voice Call Conference after it is announced Note that this interval is also used for Meet Me Conference Operation To join a Voice Call Conference if invited 1 After Conference request pres...

Page 258: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 236 Conference Voice Call Privacy Release THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 259: ...nnot access these Voice Mail options Continued Dialing for Trunk Calls Continued Dialing gives a user access to outside services like automatic banking an outside Automated Attendant bulletin boards and Other Common Carriers OCCs After the outside service answers the user can dial digits for whatever options the services allow Without Continued Dialing the system s Toll Restriction will cut off th...

Page 260: ... e g receive DTMF tones 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class Of Service 1 15 to an extension 20 13 13 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Continued Dialing In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 an extension s ability to use Continued Dialing for Intercom calls to 2500 type devices 21 04 01 Toll Restriction Class Assign a Toll Restriction Class 1 15 ...

Page 261: ...cument Revision 1 Continued Dialing 2 239 Operation To use Continued Dialing 1 Place Intercom or trunk call 2 Continue dialing after call connects Toll Restriction and Class of Service programming may limit Continued Dialing ...

Page 262: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 240 Continued Dialing THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 263: ...BR circuits are busy a busy tone is heard when the phone goes off hook Depending on your environment the maximum number of cordless devices used without interference varies This feature works with 2500 type cordless Single Line Telephones The Multiline Terminal user and the associated cordless telephone user cannot talk to each other An AP A R AP R R APA U or APR U Unit with hookflash enabled foll...

Page 264: ...DTP terminal with an APA U or APR U Unit except the DTP 2ST 1 TEL Required Component s 2500 type cordless Single Line Telephone Related Features Ancillary Device Connection Programming 20 07 Class of Service Options Administrator Level 20 08 14 Class of Service Options Operation To make a call using a cordless Single Line Telephone 1 Go off hook 2 Dial the station number or dial the Trunk Access C...

Page 265: ...cordless Single Line Telephone to its associated multiline terminal 1 The multiline terminal user goes off hook 2 The single line telephone user goes on hook at this time the call is automatically connected to the multiline terminal To transfer a call from a multiline terminal to its associated cordless single line telephone 1 The single line telephone user goes off hook at this time the call is a...

Page 266: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 244 Cordless Telephone Connection THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 267: ...e terminal and a single line telephone is assigned for Data Line Security Tone Override Voice Override and Call Alert notification tone are not heard over the speaker or the handset Data Line Security protects a station from Barge in even when Barge In is allowed in Class of Service When any multiline terminal or single line telephone calls a station with Data Line Security a constant busy tone is...

Page 268: ...ff or on an extension s ability to receive Off Hook Signaling 0 Off 1 On 20 13 06 Automatic Off Hook Signaling Allows a busy extension to manually 0 or automatically 1 receive Off Hook Signaling 0 Manually 1 Automatically 20 13 35 Block Camp On Turn off or on an extension s COS the ability to block caller from dialing to camp on 0 Off 1 On Operation None ...

Page 269: ... This feature applies to CO PBX lines Secondary Incoming Extensions Virtual Extensions and Call Arrival Keys Conditions An extension user can answer an outside call just by lifting the handset depending on programming Terminals must have a CAP or CO line appearance for a trunk call to be answered on the telephone Default Settings None System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component ...

Page 270: ...on keys Code 01 trunk port on multiline terminals 15 09 01 Virtual Extension Ring Assignment Individually program an extension s Virtual Extension key s to either ring 1 or not ring 0 15 11 01 Virtual Extension Delay Ring Assignment Individually program an extension s Virtual Extension key s for Delayed Ringing 1 or Immediate Ringing 0 20 04 03 System Options for Virtual Extensions Delay Interval ...

Page 271: ...ice Mail Operation To answer Delay Ringing calls 1 Go off hook OR Press the Answer key OR Press the flashing key Either Trunk key or CAR SIE VE key To program a CAR SIE VE key on a phone 1 Press the Speaker key 2 Dial 752 3 Press the key you want to program 4 Dial 03 5 Dial the number of the extension you want to appear on the key 6 Press the Hold key once for Immediate Ring skip to step 8 for Del...

Page 272: ...vision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 250 Delayed Ringing 9 Dial the mode number in which the key will delay ring 1 Day 1 2 Night 1 3 Midnight 1 4 Rest 1 5 Day 2 6 Night 2 7 Midnight 2 8 Rest 2 10 Press the Speaker key ...

Page 273: ...can optionally route the call to the first available group member The system follows Program 22 15 01 07 for playing the periodic VRS message User Log Out Log In An extension user can log out and log in to a Department Calling Group By logging out the user removes their extension from the group Once logged out Department Calling bypasses their extension When they log back in Department Calling rou...

Page 274: ...revents hunting to a Department Group extension if it is J Busy on a call J In Do Not Disturb J Call Forwarded J Logged Out Conditions When a DIL rings to a Department Group the DIL may follow overflow programming Programs 22 01 04 and 22 08 01 If all agents are logged out and an intercom call to the Department Group is made you will get a busy signal Extensions within a Department Group which hav...

Page 275: ...ult Setting Disabled Priority Routing Figure 2 1 Department Calling Priority Call Routing Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 3 Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 3 Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 3 CALL CALL CALL Telephone on a call Telephone on a call Telephone on a call IF IF IF ...

Page 276: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 254 Department Calling Circular Routing Figure 2 2 Department Calling Circular Routing CALL 1 CALL 2 CALL 3 CALL 4 ...

Page 277: ...ion Department Groups you set up in Program 16 02 01 10 11 11 25 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Automatic Transfer Setup for Each Department Group Use this option to set the service code default 602 to activate immediate automatic transfer for ICM and transferred calls to Department Groups 11 11 26 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Automatic Transfer Cancellation for Each ...

Page 278: ...ng 15 07 01 Programming Function Keys Assign a Department Calling key 46 so extension users can install or remove themselves from the Department Calling Group Additional keys can also be assigned for Department Group features immediate calling destination 58 delayed calling destination 59 and DND destination 60 16 01 01 Department Group Basic Data Setup Department Name Assign a name to the Extensi...

Page 279: ...n before hunting occurs 16 01 10 Department Group Basic Data Setup Hunt Type Set the type of hunting for each Department Group 0 No Queuing 1 Hunting When Busy 2 Hunting When Not Answered 3 Hunting When Busy or No Answer 16 02 01 Department Group Assignment for Extensions Assign extensions to Department Groups and set the priority assignment Department Groups 1 64 16 03 01 Secondary Department Gro...

Page 280: ... Groups 1 64 24 02 05 System Options for Transfer Transfer to Busy Department Group Recall Timer After a trunk is unscreen transferred to a busy Department Group this timer will start If the call is not answered it will recall the originator Determine how long the call should ring before recalling 0 64800 seconds 24 02 08 System Options for Transfer Delayed Transfer Timer for All Department Groups...

Page 281: ...s the Speaker key 2 Dial 650 1 OR Press Department Calling Log In key PGM 15 07 01 or SC 751 46 The key lights while you are logged out To log back in to your Department Calling Group While you log back in Department Calling will route calls to your extension 1 Press the Speaker key 2 Dial 650 0 OR Press Department Calling Log In key PGM 15 07 01 or SC 751 46 The key goes out when you log back in ...

Page 282: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 260 Department Calling THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 283: ...f the first extension called is unavailable Department Step Calling also allows an extension user to cycle through the members of a Department Group Conditions If required use this option to change the Department Step Calling Single Digit Service Code default code 2 A function key for Department Step Calling can be assigned code 36 In PGM 20 08 12 will enable 1 or disable 0 an extension s ability ...

Page 284: ...6 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class Of Service 1 15 to an extension 20 08 12 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Department Step Calling In an extension Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 an extension s ability to use Department Step Calling Related Features Department Calling Programmable Function Keys Operation To make a Step Call 1 Place a call to a busy Dep...

Page 285: ...ling Number Preview helps the user avoid dialing errors Conditions An extension user cannot edit the displayed number In order to place an outgoing call an extension user must have outgoing access to a line CAP or trunk group key If the system has VRS installed you must first press in order to preview a number Default Setting Enabled System Availability Terminals All Display Multiline Terminals Re...

Page 286: ... Number Preview to place a call multiline terminal only 1 Do not lift the handset or press the Speaker key 2 To preview any number dial the number you wish to call With VRS installed you must first press to preview the number To preview a Speed Dial System Group number press the Redial key and dial the Speed Dial System Group bin number you want to call The number displays 3 To dial out the displa...

Page 287: ... calls provide no Call Progress tones Conditions Dial Pad Confirmation Tone does not apply to single line telephones or DECT Wireless Terminals Dial Pad Confirmation Tone is not canceled when dialing in handset mode Dial Pad Confirmation Tone is canceled when dialing in handsfree mode but only for internal calls The tone will still be heard when dialing externally Default Setting Disabled System A...

Page 288: ...ming 11 11 19 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Key Touch Tone On Off If required change the service code enabling or disabling the Key Touch Tone default 724 Operation To enable disable Dial Pad Confirmation Tone 1 Pick up the handset or press the Speaker key 2 Dial 724 ...

Page 289: ... trunk s number the system will drop the trunk if dial tone does not occur If the user access the trunk via a Trunk Group by dialing a trunk group code or automatically through a feature like Last Number Redial the system can drop the trunk or optionally skip to the next trunk in the group Refer to the chart under Programming for more information Conditions None Default Setting Disabled for manual...

Page 290: ...Lines Trunk Group Routing Trunk Groups Programming Table 2 9 Dial Tone Detection Program Interaction Method 14 02 05 14 02 11 Result if dial tone not present Press a line key or Dial 9 Trunk number 0 0 Trunk hangs does not disconnect 0 1 Trunk hangs does not disconnect 1 0 Trunk drops 1 1 Trunk drops Dial a Trunk Group code or Automatically through a feature 0 0 Trunk hangs does not disconnect 0 1...

Page 291: ...d Dial ARS Last Number Redial or Save Number Dialed It does not pertain to line key or Direct Trunk Access calls 21 01 05 System Options for Outgoing Calls Dial Tone Detection Timer If dial tone detection is enabled the system will wait this interval for the Telco to return dial tone When this interval expires the system assumes dial tone is not present To disable this timer and have the system wa...

Page 292: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 270 Dial Tone Detection THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 293: ...outing to the called extension s mailbox This gives the transferring party the option of retrieving the call instead of having it go directly to the mailbox J Leaving a Message Voice Mail lets a multiline terminal extension user easily leave a message at an extension that is unanswered busy or in Do Not Disturb The caller just presses their Voice Mail key to leave a message in the called extension...

Page 294: ...urn the from their mailbox if allowed by system programming by pressing the CALL softkey or 0 Refer to Caller ID Call Return on page 2 159 Voice Mail Queuing When accessing the voice mail the system provides a voice mail queue If all the voice mail ports are busy any calls trying to get to the voice mail will be placed in queue As the voice mail ports become available the calls will be connected t...

Page 295: ...s the digit for the extension they wish to reach and Voice Mail sends the call to that extension The call is sent as a Screened or Unscreened transfer depending on programming For callers to use Directory Dialing the system must have a name programmed for each extension Each extension should also have a name recorded in their Subscriber Mailbox In addition each extension used by Directory Dialing ...

Page 296: ...ll Terminals Required Component s VMS 2 4 8 U ETU FMS 2 4 8 U ETU VMP 2 4 8 U ETU CTI LX Lite 2 4 8 U ETU CTI LX 2 4 8 U ETU Related Features Barge In Call Forwarding Fixed Caller ID Caller ID Caller Return Central Office Calls Placing Direct Inward Line DIL Hold Message Waiting One Touch Calling Programmable Function Keys ...

Page 297: ...ey 1 Default 0 If set as a Message key the user will be able to press the key to call the voice mail only when they have new messages If set as a Voice Mail key it will function as a normal Voice Mail key it will not be active if Centralized Voice Mail is used 15 03 01 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup SLT Signaling Type For each Electra Elite IPK II voice mail extension this option must be s...

Page 298: ...ler ID Display It is recommended that these options be set to on 1 for the voice mail COS 20 11 01 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Call Forward Immediate 20 11 02 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Call Forward When Busy 20 11 03 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Call Forwarding When Unanswered 20 11 04 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Call For...

Page 299: ...e master pilot number of the voice mail group from Program 11 07 01 as the DIL destination If all Voice Mail ports are in the same unique Extension Department Group see Program 16 02 above the DIL will ring another Voice Mail port if its assigned port is busy Assign Trunks As Automated Attendant Trunks Method 2 22 02 01 Incoming Call Trunk Setup Assign Service Type 0 to each trunk you want to ring...

Page 300: ...Your Mailbox To call your mailbox With a multiline terminal our Voice Mail key and your Message Center keys flash red when they have messages waiting If you do not have a Voice Mail key your MW LED flashes instead Multiline Terminal 1 Press your Voice Mail key PGM 15 07 or SC 751 77 OR Press VM Msg softkey OR Press the Speaker key and dial the Voice Mail Master Number After Voice Mail Answers dial...

Page 301: ...sage key a second time press the Speaker key or lift the handset To listen to the voice messages with Voice Message displayed press either the Message key a second time press the Speaker key or lift the handset The voice mail is called The voice mail is only called if there are new messages If the display indicates Check Messages No Messages then press the Exit key to return the telephone to an id...

Page 302: ...er your active call to a mailbox Multiline Terminal 1 Press the Hold key 2 Press the Voice Mail key PGM 15 07 or SC 751 code 77 VM Pilot OR Press the Message key 3 Dial number of mailbox to receive the transfer This number can be your mailbox number or a co worker s mailbox number OR Press DSS Console or One Touch key for extension who s mailbox will receive the Transfer If the Transfer destinatio...

Page 303: ...rd key PGM 15 07 or SC 751 code 78 You hear two beeps and your Record key flashes The beeps periodically repeat to remind you that you are recording To stop recording press the Voice Mail Record key again or press the End softkey To pause recording press the Pause softkey You can restart and stop recording as required OR 1 Place the call on hold by pressing the Hold key 2 Dial 654 or press flashin...

Page 304: ...is being recorded The message is automatically being recorded in your mailbox OR To stop audio press the Cancel softkey The message is automatically being recorded in your mailbox 2 Optional Lift the handset to take call You connect to the caller The system records the first part of the message in your mailbox With voice mail set to Manual Live Monitor Your telephone must be idle not on a call Aft...

Page 305: ... scroll through your display 3 When you find the message you want to answer press the Speaker key You will either N Go to your Voice Mail mailbox N Automatically call the extension that left you a Message Waiting If you see You have VOICE MESSAGE n MESSAGES New messages in your Voice Mail mailbox CHECK MESSAGE VRS GENERAL MESSAGE Not listened to the current General Message CHECK MESSAGE name Messa...

Page 306: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 284 Digital Voice Mail THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 307: ...er translation This gives you more flexibility when buying DID service from Telco If you can not buy the exact block of numbers you need e g 301 556 use the translation tables to convert the digits received For example a translation table could convert digits 501 756 to extension numbers 301 556 The Electra Elite IPK II system has 2000 DID Translation Table entries that you can allocate among the ...

Page 308: ...assign Automated Attendant greetings i e VRS Messages to the numbers in each Translation Table This provides you with extensive flexibility when determining which greetings the system should play for which dialed numbers You could for example set up 926 5401 through 926 5449 to route to extensions 301 349 and have 926 5450 route to the automated attendant The system allows an extension to be defin...

Page 309: ... dial tone according to the following conditions J If a VRS is installed the system sends a pre recorded message from the VRS J If a customer provided audio system example tape recorder is connected an error message or music can be played for the caller J If there is no equipment connected for an announcement the system sends a unique dial tone to the outside caller This feature is not available f...

Page 310: ...ot entered there will be no ring destination for any incoming calls to that number the calls will not ring any extension in the system Calls Can Follow Ring Group Programming for Transferring Calls An option has been added to Program 22 11 which allows you to determine if the DID routing should use the programmed ring group entry in Program 22 12 01 when transferring calls from a busy or no answer...

Page 311: ...all is ringing to their telephone Direct Inward Lines DILs also provide a way for outside callers to dial a system extension virtual extension or Department Group directly DISA also allows outside callers to dial system extensions directly The off hook Signaling provide DID calls with signaling options Refer to Off Hook Signaling for specific details DID trunks will not ring external page speakers...

Page 312: ...DTMF DID trunks be sure to reserve at least one circuit for analog trunk DTMF reception type 0 or 2 There must be an available receiver for each DTMF DID trunk Use the following as a guide when allocating DTMF receivers H In light traffic sites allocate one DTMF receiver for every 10 devices that use them H In heavy traffic sites allocate one DTMF receiver for every five devices that use them 14 0...

Page 313: ...ension for this interval and then rings Intercept Ring Group 22 02 01 Incoming Call Trunk Setup For each Night Service Mode enter service type 3 when the trunk should be a DID trunk 22 04 01 Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment Assign extensions to Ring Groups Calls ring the extensions according to programming in Program 22 06 22 09 01 DID Basic Data Setup Expected Number of Digits For each DI...

Page 314: ... In Skin External Voice Mail 103 Centralized Voice Mail 201 264 Department Group 400 Valid Extension Number DID termination to VRS 401 DISA 1000 1999 Abbreviated Number 000 999 If the Transfer Destinations are busy or receive no answer those calls are transferred to the final transfer destination Program 22 10 22 11 07 DID Translation Table Number Conversion Call Waiting For each DID Translation T...

Page 315: ...1 07 Ring Groups 1 100 102 In Skin External Voice Mail 103 Centralized Voice Mail 22 13 01 DID Trunk Group to Translation Table Assignment Assign the DID trunk groups to translation tables If all the DID trunks use the same type of DID service you may have only one DID trunk group and one DID Translation Table with many entries Trunk Groups 1 100 25 01 01 VRS DISA Line Basic Data Setup VRS DISA Di...

Page 316: ... With No Answer Busy For each trunk port 001 200 set the operating mode of each DISA trunk This sets what happens to the call when the DISA or Automated Attendant caller calls a busy or unanswered extension The call can either disconnect 0 or Transfer to an alternate destination a ring group In Skin External Centralized When setting the DISA and DID Operating Mode you make an entry for each Night ...

Page 317: ...s 25 07 04 System Timers for VRS DISA Calling Time to Automatic Answering Telephone Set Set the answering waiting time of the automatic answering extension when an incoming DID trunk call is received 0 64800 seconds 25 07 05 System Timers for VRS DISA Duration Time for Guidance Message by Automatic Answering Telephone Set Set the announcement time of the automatic answering extension after which i...

Page 318: ...01 E M Tie Line Basic Setup DID E M Start Signaling Set the start signaling mode for DID and tie trunks DID and tie trunks can use either immediate start or wink start signaling 0 2nd Dial Tone 1 Wink 2 Immediate 3 Delay Operation DID calls ring extensions like normal trunk calls ...

Page 319: ... a Technical Service department for example that covers calls for an Inside Sales department If the Inside Sales calls are not answered they ring into the Technical Service department Conditions If unanswered a DIL without delayed ringing rings an extension until the outside party hangs up If a DIL rings a Department Group and all agents are busy the system routes the call as follows 1 The trunk r...

Page 320: ...ides Call Alert Notification depending on KSU programming The second DIL call waits in line for the user to answer the call The outside caller hears ringback tone while this occurs If an extension has a line key for a DIL the call will ring the key If not the call rings an available line appearance For other extensions the DIL indicates as busy A DIL will ring its assigned extension without Ring G...

Page 321: ...IL ring a key program a line key for the DIL trunk 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class of Service 1 15 to an extension 20 09 01 Class of Service Options Incoming Call Service Second Call for DID DISA DIL E M Enable 1 or disable 0 an extension to receive a second call from a DID DISA DIL or tie line caller 20 13 23 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Display the Reaso...

Page 322: ...ber for each DIL for each Night Service mode The destination can be an extension port virtual extension number or Department Group pilot number as assigned in 11 07 01 22 08 01 DIL IRG No Answer Destination For each DIL with delayed ringing enter the DIL No Answer Ring Group An unanswered DIL rings this group after the DIL No Answer Time Make an entry for each Night Service mode Ring Groups 1 100 ...

Page 323: ...2 301 To place a call on your Direct Inward Line 1 Lift the handset 2 At the multiline terminal press the line key for DIL OR Dial 9 and the DIL trunk number e g 005 OR Dial 704 and the DIL trunk group number e g 05 OR Dial 9 for Trunk Group Access 3 Dial the number ...

Page 324: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 302 Direct Inward Line DIL THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 325: ...the routing for DISA trunks when the caller dials a busy or unanswered extension dials incorrectly or forgets to dial DISA allows 15 users 15 DISA Classes of Service and 200 trunks DISA Class of Service DISA Class of Service provides features and dialing restrictions for DISA callers This allows you to control the capabilities of the DISA callers dialing into your system When a DISA caller first a...

Page 326: ... the DISA caller to place an outgoing call over the selected trunk Direct Trunk Access bypasses the system s Trunk Group Routing ARS Trunk Access Maps As with dial 9 access any toll charges are incurred by the system J Call Forward DISA callers may be able to set Call Forwarding to redirect an extension s calls to another extension Call Forwarding ensures that the user s calls are covered when the...

Page 327: ... continue the conversation or disconnect Trunk Continue Disconnect Codes Users have the option to use a Continue or Disconnect service code The Continue service code extends the conversation for a programmed length of time If the user enters the Disconnect service code the call is immediately disconnected Example The following example indicates how a call will be handled with the system programmed...

Page 328: ...When used with the Networking feature both systems must be programmed the same In a system with ARS enabled When a DISA caller dials 9 for an outside call if allowed the system routes the call via ARS In a system with ARS disabled When a DISA caller dials 9 for an outside call if allowed the system uses the routes programmed for Trunk Group Routing Transferred calls on DISA DID DIL ISDN trunks or ...

Page 329: ...or DTMF reception entry 0 or 2 Use the following as a guide when allocating DTMF receivers H In light traffic sites allocate one DTMF receiver for every 10 devices that use them H In heavy traffic sites allocate one DTMF receiver for every five devices that use them 11 01 01 System Numbering Set up a Service Code for Alternate Trunk Route Access 11 09 02 Trunk Access Code Alternate Trunk Route Acc...

Page 330: ...play the reason Call Forward Busy No Answer or DND a VRS DID DISA or ISDN call is being transferred to their extension 20 14 01 20 14 11 Class of Service Options for DISA E M Enable 1 or disable 0 the following options for each DISA Class of Service 1 15 H First Digit Absorption Item 1 H Trunk Group Routing ARS Access Item 2 H Trunk Group Access Item 3 H System Speed Dialing Item 4 H Operator Call...

Page 331: ... Basic Data Setup VRS DISA Transfer Alarm Select whether the DISA transfer alarm should be used 0 Normal 1 Alarm 25 02 01 VRS DISA VRS Message Assign the source and VRS message number to be used as the Automated Attendant Message for each trunk 001 200 which is assigned as a VRS DISA 0 No Message 1 VRS VRS Message Number 01 48 2 ACI ACI Group Number 01 16 3 SLT Department Group Number 01 64 25 03 ...

Page 332: ...t be able to dial system extensions starting with that digit H The destination reached eight digits maximum when the caller dials the specified digit The destination can be an extension a Department Calling pilot number or the Voice Mail master number A one digit code can be assigned for each Automated Attendant message 25 07 01 System Timers for VRS DISA DISA Dial Tone Time After answering the DI...

Page 333: ...up Route chosen when a user places a DISA call into the system and dials 9 Set Trunk Group Routing in Program 14 06 If the system has ARS dialing 9 accesses ARS The route chosen is based on the DISA Class of Service which is determined by the password the caller dials Trunk Group Routes 1 100 25 11 01 DISA Toll Restriction Class If the system uses Toll Restriction enter a Toll Restriction Class 1 ...

Page 334: ...disconnects after that timer expires This timer is set again when the external digit timer expires One of the trunks used must be an analog trunk or leased line Entries 0 64800 seconds This applies to manually transferred Tandem Trunk and DISA calls 24 02 10 System Options for Transfer Trunk to Trunk Transfer Disconnect Timer Determine how long a conversation will continue 0 64800 seconds once the...

Page 335: ... 100 for an outside call OR Dial 9 a trunk number 1 200 for an outside call OR Dial 2 System Speed Dialing bin number OR Dial 0 for the operator OR Dial 701 an Internal Paging Zone number 0 1 9 00 01 64 OR Dial 703 an External Paging Zone number 1 8 or 0 for All Call OR Dial 710 a busy extension number to barge in to a call To forward an extension s calls using a DISA call into the system from any...

Page 336: ...ue code to extend a DISA call 1 An external call connects to an external number either by transferring with Tandem Trunking or by DISA caller 2 After the programmed time Program 25 07 07 a warning tone is heard and the user dials the Continue code Program 20 28 01 to extend the conversation 3 After the programmed time Program 20 28 03 the warning tone is heard again After the programmed time Progr...

Page 337: ... operator hears the message Your calls have been forwarded Central office calls ring both consoles and no message is heard by the operator You can also program the DSS Console keys to store Service Codes codes up to 29 digits long This provides the DSS Console user with many of the features available on One Touch and Programmable Feature Keys The DSS Console keys can optionally store additional as...

Page 338: ...ACD console in Program 30 01 01 For non ACD agents the console must be programmed as business console A DSS key will only indicate a Call Forwarding indication for extensions forwarded with Immediate Call Forwarding A DSS Console can have line keys for placing and answering calls The DSS Console provides one touch calling and a Busy Lamp Field for Door Boxes Refer to Door Box on page 2 303 when pr...

Page 339: ...abled the console s keys are DSS keys Program 30 03 01 System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals Required Component s None Related Features Automatic Call Distribution ACD Call Forwarding Central Office Calls Answering Central Office Calls Placing Door Box Night Service Universal Night Answer One Touch Calling Paging External Paging Internal Programmable Function Keys Speed Dial System...

Page 340: ...extension is busy 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign Class of Service 1 15 to extensions 20 17 01 Operator s Extension Operator s Extension Number Define the extension numbers which are to be used as operators 30 01 01 DSS Console Operating Mode Set the mode of the system s DSS Consoles The available options are Regular Business Mode 0 Hotel Mode 1 ACD Monitor Mode 2 and Business ACD ...

Page 341: ...DSS Hotline key lamping for multiline terminals Operation Calling an extension from your DSS Console 1 Press the DSS Console key If the call voice announces you can make it ring by dialing 1 If you do not have Handsfree you must lift the handset to speak Answering a trunk call from your DSS Console 1 Press flashing DSS Console key assigned to trunk If you do not have Handsfree you must lift the ha...

Page 342: ... Internal Page zone key Group key 1 64 If the zone you want is busy try again later If you do not have Handsfree lift the handset to make your announcement Switching the Night Service mode from your DSS Console 1 Press Night Service key External Page Busy Lamp Field When the DSS key is On Off The External Page zone is Busy Idle Internal Page Busy Lamp Field When the DSS key is On Off The Internal ...

Page 343: ... as One Touch Keys These keys can be used for Direct Station Selection Trunk Calling Personal Speed Dial Abbreviated Dialing and Service Code access The stored service code cannot be longer than three digits 1 Press DSS Console key for function For example you can forward your calls by pressing DSS Key 1 destination Your DSS key must have been previously programmed for the Call Forward feature ...

Page 344: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 322 Direct Station Selection DSS Console THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 345: ...ension user can pick up J Trunk calls i e Ring Group calls J Direct Inward Lines J Transferred trunk calls J Transferred Intercom calls J Ringing and voice announced Intercom calls Conditions Calls which were on hold or transferred which recall the extension can be answered using Directed Call Pickup Personal Park also uses the Directed Call Pickup code Voice Mail Park and Page also uses the Direc...

Page 346: ...ension Transfer Virtual Extensions Voice Mail Programming 11 12 25 Service Code Setup for Service Access Direct Call Pickup Own Group default 756 11 12 26 Service Code Setup for Service Access Call Pickup for Specified Group default 768 11 12 27 Service Code Setup for Service Access Call Pickup default 11 12 28 Service Code Setup for Service Access Call Pickup for Another Group default 769 11 12 2...

Page 347: ...Options Answer Service Directed Call Pickup for Own Group Enable 1 or disable 0 an extension s ability to use Directed Call Pickup for calls ringing their own group Operation To use Directed Call Pickup to intercept a call to a co worker s extension 1 Pick up the handset or press the Speaker key 2 Dial 3 Dial number of extension whose call you want to intercept If more than one call is coming in t...

Page 348: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 326 Directed Call Pickup THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 349: ...ions Conditions Directory Dialing sorts and searches directory names in alphabetical order based on all of the characters entered of the name when the system starts up or reboots In addition the system will re sort extension names when J You change Program 15 01 01 Extension Numbers and Names J Any user dials 700 and changes their extension s name Directory Dialing follows all the programmed optio...

Page 350: ...N EXT Co worker s Extensions Directory Dialing follows any feature restrictions that your system may have enabled For example if your extension cannot normally use Speed Dial System Group Station Directory Dialing can not access it either 4 Dial letter number range for the party you want to call e g dial 2 for A B C or 2 You can enter several letters to help narrow the search Press to enter additi...

Page 351: ...Electra Elite IPK II Document Revision 1 Directory Dialing 2 329 To cancel Directory Dialing 1 Press Exit key ...

Page 352: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 330 Directory Dialing THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 353: ...Refer to the chart below and the Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual for more details Conditions Single line telephone users cannot listen to or hear the pitch of their telephone s incoming ring DTU DTP Style phones will only follow high mid range and low ring tone settings They will not follow Melodies If 22 03 01 is set to 0 3 and 15 02 02 is set to 1 3 trunk calls will follow the ring patte...

Page 354: ...Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Trunk Ring Tone From the range specified in Program 22 03 01 select the multiline terminal extension s trunk ring tone 15 02 03 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Internal Ring Tone Select the extension s intercom ring tone 22 03 01 Trunk Ring Tone Range Set the ring tone range 1 9 for each trunk 80 01 01 Service Tone Setup Customize the system s basic tones ...

Page 355: ...alls 4 For Intercom calls select the pitch you want to check 1 8 OR For trunk calls select the pitch 1 8 and the tone 1 4 you want to check 5 Go back to step 4 to listen to additional choices or press Speaker to hang up To change the pitch of your incoming ring multiline terminal only 1 Press the Speaker key 2 Dial 720 3 Dial 1 to change ringing for Intercom calls OR Dial 2 to change ringing for t...

Page 356: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 334 Distinctive Ringing Tones and Flash Patterns THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 357: ... the DND key will blink when the extension is forwarded Call Arrival CAR Key Virtual Extension VE do not support DND Programmable Function keys Multiline Terminal users are able to activate or deactivate Do Not Disturb while on a call This option is not available for single line telephones Calls to extensions with DND active do not follow Call Forwarding programming DIL calls will ring an idle Dep...

Page 358: ...ode Setup for Setup Entry Operation Do Not Disturb Assign Service Code for DND Default 747 11 12 01 Service Code Setup for Service Access Call Forwarding DND Override In order to use the DND Override service code if voice mail is installed the single digit service code 11 16 09 must be deleted or changed as it conflicts with the DND Override code 11 16 06 Single Digit Service Code Setup DND Call F...

Page 359: ...Operation To activate or deactivate Do Not Disturb while your extension is idle Multiline Terminal 1 Do not lift the handset 2 Press the DND key OR Press the Speaker key and dial 747 3 Dial the DND option code 0 Cancel DND 1 Incoming Trunk Calls Blocked 2 Paging incoming Intercom Call Forwards and Transferred Trunk Calls Blocked 3 All calls Blocked 4 Call Forwards Blocked Single Line Telephone 1 L...

Page 360: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 338 Do Not Disturb THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 361: ... the Recall key to activate the Door Box contacts This in turn releases the electric strike on the entrance door The device connected to the Door Box contacts cannot exceed the contact ratings shown in the table below The system can have up to eight Door Boxes Six chime tones are available Conditions The Door Box Feature Requires a PGD 2 U10 ADP A maximum of 56 PGD 2 U10 ADP units can be installed...

Page 362: ...nnel 2 When a ESIB 8 U20 ETU is installed without an ESIE 8 U20 ETU installed a PGD 2 U10 ADP installed on ports 1 8 will be recognized but only channel 1 on the PGD 2 U10 ADP is supported Channel 2 is not available ESIB 8 U10 ETUs and ESIE 8 U10 ETUs do not support the PGD 2 U10 ADP Default Setting Disabled System Availability Terminals All Stations Required Component s PGD 2 U10 ADP Programming ...

Page 363: ...n the single line telephone user hookflashes or multiline terminal user presses the Recall key 32 02 01 Door Box Ring Assignments Determine which Door Boxes should ring which extensions by entering the extension number Each Door Box can be programmed to ring up to 32 extensions and an extension can be programmed to ring for multiple Door Boxes Door Boxes 1 8 32 03 01 Door Box Basic Setup Chime Pat...

Page 364: ...Telephone 1 While talking to the Door Box hookflash To answer a Door Box chime 1 Lift the handset or press the Speaker key To Answer a Door Box call while busy on another call Multiline Terminal If you are busy on a call the display will show the incoming Door Box call and the large LED will flash 1 Place your active call on hold by pressing the red Hold key 2 When you hear dial tone dial the door...

Page 365: ... for ISDN PRI or BRI Trunks 1 At the multiline terminal press the Speaker key dial SC 722 OR At Multiline Terminal only press the External Forward by Doorphone key PGM 15 07 01 or SC 751 code 54 OR At the single line telephone lift the handset dial 722 2 Dial the Door Box number 1 4 3 Dial the Abbreviated Dialing number where the calls should be forwarded 4 Press Speaker or hang up at the single l...

Page 366: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 344 Door Box THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 367: ...able Function Key This feature allows the Recall key to be used to provide a hookflash to the PBX or Central Office A single line telephone user can use the Drop Key function by an access code Conditions The Drop key provides a timed disconnect signal on CO PBX lines The Drop key cannot be used for internal DID or Tie line calls Default Setting None System Availability Terminals All Stations Requi...

Page 368: ... 0 Timed Flash 1 Disconnect 15 02 05 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Transfer Key Operation Mode If the Conf key should access Flash enter 2 Otherwise enter 0 or 1 15 03 04 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup Flashing In a single line 500 2500 type telephone s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 the ability to hookflash for system feature access 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Assig...

Page 369: ...er To use the Feature Key plus Recall key from a Multiline Terminal with a CO PBX call in progress 1 Press the Feature key 2 Press the Recall key Receive the new CO PBX dial tone 3 Dial the desired number To use the Drop key feature from a single line telephone with a CO PBX call in progress 1 Hookflash 2 Receive internal dial tone 3 Dial the Service Code PRG 11 12 59 Default Not Assigned 4 Receiv...

Page 370: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 348 Drop Key THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 371: ... is displayed When there is no transmission between the Base Unit and the handset for about five minutes there are no LCD or LED indications on the cordless terminal handset Ringing off hook or pressing keys resumes LCD and LED indications The ring pattern for the cordless terminal can be selected by System Programming and Multiline Terminals When a cordless terminal is ringing press the flashing ...

Page 372: ...20 feet anytime Radio interference causes interruptions in conversation When this happens your unit is not defective When noise continues move to a different location while you talk You might even need to move the base unit When the situation persists contact NEC Unified Solutions Inc National Technical Assistance Center NTAC Environments with many metal parts metal shelves or metal buildings have...

Page 373: ... Hook Ringing ON OFF LCD indicates ON or OFF 8 Press TALK to exit Function keys F1 F4 can be programmed as Line Keys 1 16 Redial LNR SPD Answer ANS Feature FNC or Recall When assigned these keys operate the same as on an NEC Multiline Terminal When initially installed function keys F1 F4 default to Line Keys 1 4 respectively and Off Hook Ringing defaults to ON Global Off Hook Ringing must be ON de...

Page 374: ...1 F4 After a programmed time the held call recalls to the originating terminal To redial a number 1 Press REDIAL 2 The previously dialed number is called To transfer a call 1 With a call in process press TRANSFER 2 Dial Station Number OR Press F1 F4 programmed for Direct Station Selection DSS 3 Announce call optional 4 Press TALK to complete transfer To place a conference call 1 With a call in pro...

Page 375: ... hold MUTE lower key on left side 2 Release MUTE to activate microphone To use the Charging Unit 1 Place handset and or spare battery in the charging slots 2 The Charge 1 LED is on red during and after charging the handset 3 The Charge 2 LED is on red while charging the spare battery and turns after charging is complete If the handset is placed in the charger without an installed battery the Charg...

Page 376: ...e Base Unit is in Desk mode 2 Remove battery 3 Press and hold Jand Lon the handset 4 Install the battery while holding these keys 5 After the handset beeps one time release the keys 6 The handset is in Setup mode 7 Press HOLD to display the current mode Digital Redial 8 Press F2 and then HOLD 9 The handset displays Digital F8 and changes the REDIAL key program to Desk Cordless Softkey Switching mo...

Page 377: ...Elite IPK II Document Revision 1 Dterm Cordless II Terminal 2 355 13 To restore the normal redial function enter setup mode and press F3 and HOLD to display Digital Redial 14 Press TALK to restore standby mode ...

Page 378: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 356 Dterm Cordless II Terminal THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 379: ... of six hours typical and a Standby Mode of five days typical The battery can be hot swapped while on a call The battery must be replaced with another charged battery pack within 20 seconds otherwise the connection is lost The handset has visual and audible indicators to warn of a low battery condition Feature Dterm Cordless Lite II DTH 4R 1 Digital Technology 900 MHz FM with ADPCM digital LCD 2 l...

Page 380: ...roduct The battery can be charged only when it is installed in the handset and the handset is in the charger A stand alone battery charger is not available Environments with many metal parts metal shelves or metal buildings have been found to reduce telephone performance When multiple cordless telephones are used in your office they must operate on different channels and be at least 20 feet apart ...

Page 381: ... and feature options for function key F1 3 Press On Off MUTE to select the displayed line key or feature 4 When a Line key is assigned press MUTE once to enter the Off Hook Ringing ON or OFF Mode Press Ring Vol to toggle between TALK for On or NO TALK for Off TALK is selected when the F1 F4 function keys are programmed for CO or Call Appearance Keys NO TALK is selected when F1 F4 function keys are...

Page 382: ... following is applicable J Switching between the cordless mode and desk mode must be done while both telephones are idle J A call in progress can not be switched between the Dterm Cordless Lite II and the associated Multiline Telephone J Switching held calls between the Dterm Cordless Lite II Telephone and the associated Multiline Telephone is not recommended because line key LED indications are n...

Page 383: ... of Uniden America Corp J Any Key Answer J LED Low Battery Warning J Talk Talk Transfer Trf Mute Mute Channel Ch Volume Vol and Ringer On Off keys J 4 hour Talk Time J 40 hour Standby Time Conditions The Handset Cordless terminal provides 40 different channels for communication with the Base Unit When communication is stopped for about 30 seconds during handset conversation the Handset Cordless te...

Page 384: ...hout obstructions depending on the environment Distance of DTP 16HC 1 from the switch is 60 Meters 197 Feet Condition is less than 10 ohms loop resistance Maximum distance when ACA U Unit is connected is 330 meters 1 083 Feet Condition is less than 57 ohms loop resistance The Handset does not ring when the battery is low The standard charged nickel cadmium battery may last four hours for conversat...

Page 385: ... need to move the Base Unit When the situation persists contact NEC Unified Solutions Inc National Technical Assistance Center NTAC Default Setting None System Availability Terminals DTP 16HC 1 TEL AC A U Power Adapter Required Component s None Related Features None Programming None Operation All Operating Procedures assume these features are assigned to the DTP 16HC 1 terminal J Prime Line Pickup...

Page 386: ...nit lift it and press any key 2 The Talk Batt low LED flashes then lights continuously to indicate established communication path between the Handset and the Base Unit 3 Talk to the caller The Message waiting LED is Off 4 When finished press the Talk key or place Handset back in the Base Unit to disconnect the call With Auto Talk On 1 When the Handset is on the Base Unit lift it 2 The Talk Batt lo...

Page 387: ...te again to reactivate the microphone Voice is not transmitted during Mute To make a call with Auto Talk Off 1 Lift the Handset from the Base Unit 2 Press Talk key 3 The Talk Batt low LED flashes then lights continuously to indicate an established communication path between the Handset and the Base Unit and dial tone is generated 4 Dial the number 5 Talk to the party 6 When finished press the Talk...

Page 388: ...it 1 With a call in progress press Conf on the Base Unit 2 Dial another station number 3 Announce Conference Optional 4 Press Conf on the Base Unit to establish the conference To Install the battery 1 Slide the battery compartment cover on the lower Handset back down to remove it 2 Remove the IMPORTANT charging NOTE from the battery compartment 3 Align the guides on the bottom of the battery plug ...

Page 389: ... them to the local 10 100 LAN From there they reach the Dterm IP Branch unit that converts the IP packets back to standard TDM voice signals for distribution to attached Dterm Series E Electra Elite telephones The Dterm IP Branch supports up to 12 voice circuits When the remote site is a telecommuter at home or only a few users the remote IP TDM conversion is performed by a Dterm IP Adapter that f...

Page 390: ...es and modems cannot operate with a Dterm Multiline Terminal that is connected to an APR U Unit or AP A R Unit optional adapter The CT A R Unit CTA U Unit or CTU S U Unit cannot be installed to a KTS remote Multiline Terminal to provide TAPI functionality with the KTS The DTP 32DE 1 Multiline Terminal is the only one certified for use in a home environment None of the other Dterm Series E or Elect...

Page 391: ...stem Availability Terminals DTU DTP DTR Multiline Terminals DTP 32DE 1 for home environment Required Component s Components include the following Electra Elite IPK II KTS with 1 ESI port for each Branch port and IP Adapter Gateway unit Branch unit and or IP Adapters with total ports not exceeding the number of ports supported by the Gateway unit Power Cord RS 530 cable 2 RJ 21 50 pin cables to con...

Page 392: ...hernet for an IP connection Network Requirements The Gateway must be installed on an existing LAN or WAN network Each unit requires a network device that supports a synchronous serial interface or an Ethernet connection to a TCP IP network The network must be operational and active to complete installation of the Gateway The network device must support one of the following J Synchronous serial sig...

Page 393: ...new call on one appearance with a call in progress on the other Conditions Normally both line appearances must be busy to return a busy signal to the caller however check any incoming features for specific interactions Default Setting Enabled System Availability Terminals Required Component s Related Features Distinctive Ringing Tones and Flash Patterns Set up busy and idle extension flash pattern...

Page 394: ...ry Service Automatic off hook Signaling In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 the extension s ability to automatically send off hook Signals while busy on a handset call Setting this option to 0 will prevent Intercom calls from ringing the CALL2 key instead the caller will hear a busy signal Operation None ...

Page 395: ...l disregard Program 20 03 03 System Options for Single Lines Telephones SLT DTMF Dial to Trunk Lines This will prevent the system from connecting to a trunk until all the digits are dialed This can be avoided by using either 8 or 9x but not 91 as the trunk access code Be aware that this change will require additional programming changes 3 When using external E911 equipment do not allow analog sing...

Page 396: ...programmed to send E911 calls to the trunk connected to the E911 box This is done by assigning the trunk to the E911 trunk group and using ARS to route all 911 calls to that port The Dial Treatment must then be set to send the extension number and 911 to that port This is usually accomplished using XRE in the Dial Treatment but check the requirements of your E911 box J Calling Party Identification...

Page 397: ...unk Group Routing Set up an outbound routing table for trunk groups assigned in Program 14 05 This program and Program 21 02 are the minimum required if E911 must seize a line to dial Trunk Group Routes 1 100 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class of Service to an extension 1 15 20 08 16 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Display E911 Dialed Extension Name and Number I...

Page 398: ...0 System Availability Terminals None Required Component s None Related Features Automatic Route Selection ARS Central Office Calls Placing T1 Trunking with ANI DNIS Compatibility Operation To place an emergency 911 call When Dial 911 Routing Without Trunk Access is enabled 1 Go to any telephone 2 Lift the handset or press the Speaker key 3 Dial 911 When Dial 911 Routing Without Trunk Access is dis...

Page 399: ...ess code e g 9 or press a line key 4 Dial 911 To turn off the E911 Alarm at your telephone 1 Lift the handset or press the Speaker key 2 Dial 786 The alarm goes off OR if you have a display telephone 1 Press Exit once to turn off the alarm 2 Press Exit again to clear the alarm display ...

Page 400: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 378 E911 Compatibility THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 401: ...Feature Recall Conference Redial Hold Transfer Answer Speaker Microphone Directory and Message The dial pad is detachable allowing for easy customization for a foreign language French or Spanish or for Automatic Call Distribution ACD applications All Electra Elite IPK II Terminals are Class B devices and comply with U S FCC regulations for office and residential use They also comply with requireme...

Page 402: ...acts as a VM access key to call the VM pilot number Feature selection 15 02 26 The distance from the KSU for IPK Multiline Terminals DTH type can be extended when local AC power is provided When the IPK Terminal is powered by a local AC R Unit AC Adapter a built in Long Line Adapter allows these telephones to be connected up to a distance of 2000 feet by Twisted 1 Pair Cable at 24 AWG For compatib...

Page 403: ...ITH 8D 2 telephones when in line power power over Ethernet is not provided or the ILPA R is not used The distance from the KSU for Electra Elite IPK II DTH Multiline Terminals can be extended when local AC power is provided When the Electra Elite IPK II terminal is powered by a local AC 2R AC 3R Unit AC Adapter a built in Long Line Adapter allows these telephones to be connected up to 2 000 feet b...

Page 404: ... Settings None System Availability Terminals DTH 16LD 1 TEL DTH 32D 1 TEL DTH 16D 1 TEL DTH 8D 1 TEL DTH 8 1 TEL DCR 60 1 CONSOLE IP Terminals J ITH 16D 2 TEL J ITH 8D 2 TEL Required Component s ESI 8 U ETU ESIB 8 U ETU ESIE 8 U UNIT IP ETU J IPD 4 8 U ETU for IP Terminals Optional Component s AD A R UNIT Adapter for Call Recording AP A R UNIT Analog Port Adapter without Ringer AP R R UNIT Analog ...

Page 405: ...F R UNIT French Button Unit BS S R UNIT Spanish Button Unit WM R UNIT Wall Mount Unit AC 2R Unit AC Adapter AC 3R Unit AC Adapter PC Type IP Units J AD A 2R UNIT Adapter for Call Recording J ILPA R In Line Power Adapter Related Features Ancillary Device Connection Electra Elite Terminal Migration Electronic Volume Control Feature Access User Programmable IP Station MEGACO MG 16 Off Hook Signaling ...

Page 406: ... Dedicated Function Keys 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 Line Feature Access Programmable Feature Access Key 16 32 16 8 8 16 8 LCD 3x24 Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Call Message Indicator Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Adjustable Base Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Built in Wall Mount Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Headset Jack Built in Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes DESI Label by LCD Yes No No No No No No Receiver Volume...

Page 407: ...te or Black White or Black White or Black White or Black White or Black White or Black Softkeys Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes A maximum of 32 keys may be programmed as Function Keys Table 2 11 Electra Elite IPK Telephone Specifications Continued DTH 16LD 1 DTH 32D 1 DTH 16D 1 DTH 8D 1 DTH 8 1 ITH 16D 2 ITH 8D 2 ...

Page 408: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 386 Electra Elite IPK Terminals THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 409: ...IPK II systems With very few exceptions all telephone features and abilities that are possible on Electra Elite 48 192 are also possible with the Electra Elite IPK II system Conditions Restrictions Dedicated Function Keys for Microphone Directory and Message are not provided with Electra Elite Multiline Terminals Electra Professional Multiline Terminals are not supported with the Electra Elite IPK...

Page 410: ... Ancillary Device Connection Electra Elite IPK Terminals Handsfree and Monitor Off Hook Signaling Softkeys Programming 10 03 01 Terminal Type B1 15 07 Programmable Function Keys 20 07 Class of Service Administrator Level 20 08 14 Class of Service Operation Refer to individual features for details ...

Page 411: ...ecorded voice optional text to speech call flow logic access to relevant data and records voice input for later handling Using computer telephony integration CTI the IVR can hand off a call to someone that can view data related to the caller at a display The programmable IVR uses open database connectivity ODBC connections to databases to allow complete customizing of call flows and information an...

Page 412: ...d if logic control with up to 20 levels of nesting N goto for branching to a label N exec to start a whole new program N run and return to execute a function with nesting and continue N User embedding of comments and tracing information N User generation of events J Logging N Unlimited number of user definable logs N User specified information in logs N Date and time stamping of all log entries J ...

Page 413: ...able to the results of a function N Use variables anywhere in script syntax J Strings N String extraction Left Mid Right N String replacement N System information current day of month day of week year month hour minute date N Temporary unique name generation N File Control N Rename files N Remove files N Copy files N Test the existence of a file or directory Conditions The IVR 8 U ETU is assigned ...

Page 414: ... ETU Related Features Digital Voice Mail Programming 11 02 01 Extension Numbering 11 07 01 Department Group Pilot Number 15 03 03 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup 16 01 Department Group Basic Data Setup 16 02 Department Group Assignment for Extension Operation Operating procedures depend on the application ...

Page 415: ...pensive calls and most frequently called numbers These reports can be used to analyze your telephone as a critical business communication tool improve its business effectiveness and reduce your telephone costs A report can be generated showing calling patterns by volume or duration on a color coded United States map This can help a Customer Support Sales Order or Telemarketing business become more...

Page 416: ...ormat The following optional modules of Elite CallAnalyst Software require license upgrade J Network Client Network clients must then call NEC for additional licensing The license is issued on the CallAnalyst Server installation All license information is maintained on the server PC Because the license is unique to the PC where the server is installed you must follow the help files in the license ...

Page 417: ...Ethernet Minimum PC Requirements PC with Pentium Processor 64 Mb Ram VGA monitor 800 X 600 resolution SVGA 1024 X 768 recommended Windows 95 98 Me NT SP 3 or later 2000 80 Mb free hard drive space CD ROM drive When using CD for installation Available serial port and RS 232 cable Printer for reports The Elite CallAnalyst software should be installed on a separate PC but other applications may be in...

Page 418: ...the date will be displayed regardless of the setting for display of trunk name Program 35 02 03 and only the trunk number is printed J For example if trunk port 049 has a trunk name of PRI Ch1 if Program 35 02 03 0 name and 35 02 14 1 display date then SMDR will show 8 19 049 However if Program 35 02 14 0 date not displayed the SMDR will show PRI Ch1 J For proper handling of DNIS calls the name fi...

Page 419: ... SMDR Options Output Destination Number This option specified the SMDR printer output extension CTA extension number 35 01 03 SMDR Options Header Language Specify the language in which the SMDR header should be printed 0 English 1 German 2 French 3 Italian 4 Spanish This entry must be 0 for Elite CallAnalyst 35 01 04 SMDR Options Omit Digits The number of digits entered for this option do not prin...

Page 420: ...rt 1 8 CTA Adapter 15 02 19 Multi Line Telephone Basic Data Setup CTA Data Communication Mode Change the system programming to match the CTA adapter s dip switch settings 15 02 20 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Baud Rate for CTA Port Select the baud rate to be used by the CTA Adapter 0 4800 1 9600 2 19200 LAN Connection 10 12 01 CPUII U Network Setup IP Address When using an IP connection se...

Page 421: ...p Baud Rate for COM Port If the SMDR connection is made using the COM port on the CPUII U define the baud rate 0 4800 1 9600 2 19200 3 38400 Operation Refer to Central Office Calls Answering on page 2 163 and Central Office Calls Placing on page 2 171 features for detailed operations for placing or answering calls ...

Page 422: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 400 Elite CallAnalyst THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 423: ...onnect a facsimile in branch to a direct CO PBX line Connection of the facsimile machine does not require extra system ports The Electra Elite IPK II systems cannot distinguish between an incoming facsimile call and a CDO PBX call Ringing assignments should be turned off for fax lines A facsimile call terminating at the CO PBX line where the Fax Branch Unit is connected is automatically answered b...

Page 424: ...100 22 01 04 DIL No Answer Recall Time Timing 0 64800 sec default 0 22 04 Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment Maximum 8 digits up to 32 extensions per group 22 05 Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment 0 No Setting 1 8 or 001 100 Incoming Group 102 In Skin External Voice Mail 103 Centralized Voice Mail 22 08 DIL IRG No Answer Destination Incoming Group Number 0 No Setting 001 100 Incoming Group...

Page 425: ...the trunk loop current Flash lets an extension user take full advantage of whatever features the connected Telco or PBX offers You must set the Flash parameters for compatibility with the connected Telco or PBX Conditions The system does not provide a ground flash Default Setting Enabled System Availability Terminals All Stations Required Component s None ...

Page 426: ...c Data Setup Transfer Key Operation Mode In order for the Cordless Lite Cordless Lite II telephone user to be able to use the flash function this option must be set to 2 This changes the Transfer key to a Flash key 15 03 04 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup Flashing In a single line 500 2500 type telephone s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 the ability to hookflash for system feature ac...

Page 427: ...Electra Elite IPK II Document Revision 1 Flash 2 405 Operation To flash the trunk you are on From a Multiline Terminal 1 Press the Recall key From a Single Line Telephone 1 Hookflash 2 Dial 3 ...

Page 428: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 406 Flash THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 429: ...st applications you can alter the code if needed The system provides a completely flexible system numbering plan Refer to the chart below and the Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual for more details Flexible System Numbering Program Description 11 01 System Numbering Set the system s internal Intercom numbering plan The numbering plan includes the digits an extension user must dial to access f...

Page 430: ...6 05 must be removed If not pressing the second DSS key will actually camp you on to the first extension Since making changes in Program 11 01 does not automatically make any other changes in any other program changing the number plan after the system is in operation may cause problems in the following programs Any feature which requires dialing a code or extension number can be affected 11 01 Typ...

Page 431: ...ort 1 201 VE Port 99 299 J VE Port 100 3301 VE Port 256 3457 System Availability Terminals All Stations Required Component s None Related Features None Programming 11 01 01 System Numbering Customize the system s internal Intercom numbering plan 11 02 01 Extension Numbering Assign extension numbers to extension ports The telephone s programming identity follows the port number not the extension nu...

Page 432: ...Setup for Setup Entry Operation 11 12 01 Service Code Setup for Service Access 11 13 01 Service Code Setup for ACD 11 14 01 Service Code Setup for Hotel 11 15 01 Service Code Setup Administrative for Hotel Customize the Service Codes 11 16 01 Single Digit Service Code Setup Assign the Single Digit post dialing Service Codes Operation Not applicable ...

Page 433: ...ts an extension s Callback or Trunk Queuing 20 04 03 20 31 03 Call Coverage Delay Interval Time Virtual Extension Key If CAR VE is set for Delayed Ringing Program 15 11 01 ring the covering extension after this interval Station Timer Class is referred by the station assigned to CAR VE 21 01 02 20 31 04 Intercom Inter digits Time When placing Intercom calls users must dial each digit within this in...

Page 434: ...ime An Exclusive Hold Recall rings an extension for this interval If not picked up the call goes back on Non exclusive Hold Station Timer Class is referred by held call 24 01 06 20 31 14 Park Hold Time Normal A call left parked longer than this interval recalls the extension that initially parked it Trunk or Station Timer Class is referred by held call 24 02 03 20 31 15 Delayed Call Forwarding Tim...

Page 435: ...necting a trunk to trunk conversation call after the Long Conversation tone is heard Trunk Timer Class is referred 25 07 09 20 31 21 DISA Internal Paging Time This is the maximum length of an Internal Page placed by a DISA caller If the Page continues longer than this interval the system terminates the DISA call Trunk Timer Class is referred 25 07 10 20 31 22 DISA External Paging Time This is the ...

Page 436: ...ber 20 30 01 Timer Class for Trunks Assign the timer class 0 16 to each trunk for each Night mode 20 31 01 23 Timer Class Timer Assignment Assign times These timers are referred when a class is set any number from 1 to 16 in 20 29 01 20 30 01 When the timer class is set to 0 in 20 29 01 20 30 01 current timer system wide basis is referred refer to the table above for more detailed information abou...

Page 437: ...ce technicians can also use Forced Trunk Disconnect to release a trunk on which there is no conversation This can happen if a trunk does not properly disconnect when the outside party hangs up Conditions This feature only works on analog trunk ISDN trunks do not have the Forced Trunk Disconnect available Default Setting COS 15 Enabled COS 2 14 Disabled System Availability Terminals All Terminals R...

Page 438: ... an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 the ability to use Forced Trunk Disconnect Operation To disconnect a busy trunk Multiline Terminal 1 Press line key for trunk OR Dial trunk access code 9 trunk number You hear busy tone Trunk numbers are 001 200 2 Dial the Service Code not set at default You hear confirmation beeps as the system disconnects the trunk You can now place a call o...

Page 439: ...access code 9 trunk number You hear busy tone Trunk numbers are 001 200 2 Dial Service Code not set at default You hear confirmation beeps as the system disconnects the line 3 Hookflash You can now place a call on the free line 4 Dial the trunk access code 9 trunk number for the trunk disconnected in Step 2 ...

Page 440: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 418 Forced Trunk Disconnect THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 441: ...ging the user s own pickup group J A call ringing another pickup group when the user knows the group number J A call ringing another pickup group when the user does not know the group number There are 64 Call Pickup Groups available Conditions A Call Pickup Group cannot have an associated name Group Call Pickup cannot be used to answer calls recalling from Hold or Park Group Call Pickup cannot be ...

Page 442: ...n Group is not acceptable change the code as required 11 12 26 Service Code Setup for Service Access Call Pickup for Specified Group If the default service code 768 for Call Pickup for Specified Group is not acceptable change the code as required 11 12 27 Service Code Setup for Service Access Call Pickup If the default service code for Call Pickup is not acceptable change the code as required 11 1...

Page 443: ...roup Call Pickup from Another Group In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 an extension s ability to pick up calls ringing telephones that are not in their pickup group Service Code 769 20 10 03 Class of Service Options Answer Service Group Call Pickup for Specific Group In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 an extension s ability to pick up calls ringing a spe...

Page 444: ... Service Code 756 cannot pick up Ring Group calls To answer a call ringing a telephone in another Pickup Group when you do not know the group number 1 Pick up the handset or press the Speaker key 2 Multiline Terminal only Press the Group Call Pickup key PGM 15 07 or SC 751 25 OR Dial 769 To answer a call ringing a telephone in another Pickup Group when you know the group number 1 Pick up the hands...

Page 445: ...inal user s co workers listen to the conversation Group Listen turns off the multiline terminal handsfree microphone so the caller does not pick the coworker s voices during a Group Listen Conditions An extension in the headset mode cannot use Group Listen Group Listen is not available to single line telephones Default Setting Disabled System Availability Terminals Any Multiline Terminal Required ...

Page 446: ...er call using the handset 2 Press Speaker twice but do not hang up Speaker flashes slowly You can talk to the caller through your handset Y our co workers hear your caller s voice over your telephone s speaker after pressing the Speaker key twice Pressing the Speaker key a third time turns off Group Listening To Talk Handsfree after initiating Group Listen 1 Hang up the handset To cancel Group Lis...

Page 447: ...ss the MIC button to mute the transmit speech path The station user can still hear the outside or intercom voice Conditions The MIC Key and or Handset Transmission Cut Off key will flash when active Two service set tones will be heard when Handset Mute is activated or deactivated Default Setting None System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals Required Component s None Related Features P...

Page 448: ...n Cut Off code 40 80 01 01 Basic Hardware Setup for System Service Tone 25 Service Set Tone this option allows the service set tone to be disabled Operation While talking on a terminal handset 1 Press MIC key DTH DTR terminals only OR 2 Press the Feature key dial 1 OR 3 Press the Handset Transmission Cut Off key PRG15 07 01 Key 40 or SC 751 Key Code 40 ...

Page 449: ...ey or virtual extension key without first lifting the handset or pressing the Speaker key An extension can have Automatic Handsfree for just outgoing calls or both outgoing calls and incoming calls J Monitor User can place a call without lifting the handset but must lift the handset to speak Conditions Handsfree and Monitor are not available for single line telephones Prime Line Selection affects ...

Page 450: ...eakerphone on outside calls When disabled users can hear the conversion but cannot respond handsfree 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign Class of Service 1 15 for extensions 20 02 12 System Options for Multiline Telephones Forced Intercom Ringing Use this option to enable 1 or disable 0 Forced Intercom Ringing If enabled incoming Intercom calls normally ring If disabled Intercom calls ...

Page 451: ...ard the telephone when the called party answers To change a handset call into a Handsfree call 1 Press the Speaker key and hang up the handset 2 Press the Speaker key again to hang up To change a Handsfree call into a handset call 1 Lift the handset To turn on off Monitor 1 Press the MIC key Feature 1 or the Microphone Function Key PGM 15 07 or SC 751 02 to turn on or off the Microphone Monitor is...

Page 452: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 430 Handsfree and Monitor THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 453: ...r workers who do not have a free hand to pick up the handset Conditions Handsfree Answerback does not require the Speaker phone to be enabled PGM 15 02 16 A Multiline Terminal user can process calls using the speaker and microphone in the telephone instead of the handset With Microphone Cutoff enabled Handsfree Answerback callers to an extension hear a single beep instead of two Incoming Intercom ...

Page 454: ...p Handsfree Operation Enable 1 or disable 0 an extensions ability to use the speakerphone on outside calls Users can hear the conversation but cannot respond handsfree 20 02 12 System Options for Multiline Telephones Forced Intercom Ringing Enable 1 or disable 0 Forced Intercom Ringing If disabled 0 Intercom calls voice announce 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class Of Service 1 ...

Page 455: ... disables Forced Intercom Ringing To enable Forced Intercom Ringing for your incoming Intercom calls 1 Press idle the Speaker key 2 Dial 723 3 Press Speaker to hang up This disables Handsfree Answerback To change the way your Intercom call signals the extension you are calling 1 Dial 1 If ringing your call voice announces If voice announced your call starts to ring the destination This option is a...

Page 456: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 434 Handsfree Answerback Forced Intercom Ringing THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 457: ... extension appearances are busy i e Off Hook Signaling allowed As the headset plugs into a separate jack on the bottom of the telephone the handset can still be connected to the telephone This provides you with the option to use the handset headset or the speakerphone for calls Conditions While using the headset the Headset function key becomes a release disconnect key and no dial tone is heard fr...

Page 458: ...adset Busy Mode Set the conditions under which a headset extension is busy to incoming callers H The Headset extension is busy to incoming callers when only one extension appearance is busy 0 OR H Headset extension is busy to incoming callers only when both extension appearances are busy 1 20 02 12 System Options for Multiline Telephones Forced Intercom Ringing Determine whether intercom calls sho...

Page 459: ...hen you re on a call To disconnect press the Headset key again You can still use the handset for calls or respond to voice announced Intercom calls with the headset plugged in The headset only activates when the Headset key is pressed J Answer a ringing call by pressing the Headset key OR J Press the Headset key and then a line key or press the Speaker key then 9 to make a outgoing call OR J Press...

Page 460: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 438 Headset Operation THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 461: ... trunk Exclusive hold is important if a user does not want a co worker picking up their call on Hold J Group Hold If a user places a call on Group Hold another user in the Department Group can dial a code to pick up the call This lets members of a department easily pick up each other s calls J Intercom Hold A user can place an Intercom call on Hold The Intercom call on Hold does not indicate at an...

Page 462: ...n Hold hear Music on Hold if programmed An extension can have function keys for System Hold and Exclusive Hold Analog single line telephones can only use Exclusive Hold and Group Hold Default Setting Enabled System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s None Related Features Music on Hold Programmable Function Keys Single Line Telephones Analog 500 2500 Sets ...

Page 463: ...ts the access options for trunks on Hold Trunk Access Maps 1 200 15 02 06 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Hold Key Operating Mode Set the function of the extension s Hold key 0 System 1 Exclusive 15 02 07 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Automatic Hold for CO Line Determines whether an extension will automatically hold the trunk line 1 or disconnect it 0 when you direct select a CO line w...

Page 464: ...he timers will restart This will continue until the call is answered or the caller hangs up 20 17 01 Operator s Extension Assign an operator s extension number if Hold Recall to Operator will be used 24 01 01 System Options for Hold Hold Recall Time Set the Hold Recall Time 0 64800 seconds A call on Hold recalls the extension that placed it on Hold after this interval 24 01 02 System Options for H...

Page 465: ... number 001 200 Exclusive Hold To place an outside call on Exclusive Hold 1 Press the Exclusive Hold key PGM 15 07 01 or SC 751 45 OR Press the Feature Hold keys Single Line Telephone 1 Hookflash 2 Dial 749 To pick up an outside call on Exclusive Hold 1 Press flashing CAP key Single Line Telephone 1 Dial 759 Group Hold To place a call on Hold so anyone in your Department Group can pick it up 1 Pre...

Page 466: ...pick up a call on Group Hold 1 Press the Speaker key 2 Dial 762 Single Line Telephone 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 762 Intercom Hold To place an Intercom call on Intercom Hold 1 Press Hold 2 Press Speaker to hang up To pick up an Intercom call on Intercom Hold 1 Press the Speaker key 2 Press the flashing Conf key ...

Page 467: ...our guests one touch access to your important Hotel Motel services They can just lift the handset and press a single key for J Extensions such as the front desk reservation services housekeeping or the maitre d of your restaurant J Feature Access Codes for one button access to selected features and outside lines J Voice Mail so your guests can leave requests even when your service providers are un...

Page 468: ...ample you can dial simple codes to set a room s status Room Status Printouts The Room Status Printouts give you a concise overview of the status of all your guest rooms at a glance The printouts provide up to the minute reports showing Room Status Room Call Restriction Do Not Disturb Message Waiting and Wake Up Calls If your cleaning staff needs to know which room s to clean up for example just pr...

Page 469: ...ired Component s DSS Console Related Features Do Not Disturb Code Restriction Department Calling Flexible System Numbering Programming Refer to the Electra Elite IPK II Hotel Motel Services Guide for complete programming information Operation Refer to the Electra Elite IPK II Hotel Motel Services Guide for complete operation information ...

Page 470: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 448 Hotel Motel THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 471: ...ension user cannot use Hotline to pick up a call ringing their partner s extension If a station is an ACD agent the Hotline key blinks to indicate the ACD agent s status Hotline keys can be assigned to the DSS consoles Hotline does not override Do Not Disturb Hotline always follows the Handsfree Answerback Forced Intercom Ringing mode set at the called extension The Hotline caller can override the...

Page 472: ...tion Keys Assign a function key for Hotline code 01 partner s extension number 15 02 22 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Multiple Incoming From Intercom and Trunk When this option is set to 0 disabled incoming calls to an extension will indicate on any Hotline keys for that extension as solid busy When this option is set to 1 enabled lamping is determined by the setting of Program 22 01 01 Inc...

Page 473: ...utomatic Off Hook Transfer 0 Off 1 On 22 01 01 System Options for Incoming Calls Incoming Call Priority Use this option to determine if intercom calls or trunk calls have answer priority when both are ringing simultaneously 0 Intercom Call Priority 1 Trunk Call Priority Refer to Program 15 02 22 for lamping conditions 30 05 01 DSS Console Lamp Table If required use this program to customize the sy...

Page 474: ...s the Hotline key 2 Announce call and hang up OR Hang up to have the call wait at your Hotline partner unannounced If unanswered the call recalls like a regular transferred call To answer a call from your Hotline partner 1 If you hear two beeps speak toward the telephone OR 1 If your telephone rings lift the handset ...

Page 475: ...ter a call is completed or when a station is off hook and digits are not dialed in a programmed time Conditions Howler tone is generated 30 seconds after a call is disconnected and the telephone is left off hook or the telephone is left off hook without dialing Default Setting Enabled System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s None Related Features None ...

Page 476: ...vice Tone Setup Set repeat count for tone 16 Lockout default 0 endless 80 01 02 DTMF Tone Setup Defines the Basic Tone duration on time and pause off time for Service Tone 16 Lockout This option affects all internal stations system wide You make separate entries for duration and pause It is also possible to adjust the level of both high and low frequency tones Operation Not applicable ...

Page 477: ...t talking to the extension or which line is in use by the extension can be displayed The details of the trunk s busy status the extension using the line can be displayed after trying to access the trunk This feature provides a user information which can determine whether they should use the Barge In feature for the extension or trunk This information automatically displays for a multiline terminal...

Page 478: ...3 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Display Language Selection for Multiline Terminal Select the service code which can be used at an extension to change the displayed language on a multiline terminal s display default 678 15 02 01 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Display Language Selection Select the language which should be used on a multiline terminal s display 0 Japanese 5 Spani...

Page 479: ... Display In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 an extension s ability to use the Busy Status Display feature 20 17 01 Operator s Extension Assign the operator s extension 20 18 01 Service Tone Timer Extension Dial Tone Time Set the Extension Dial Tone Time 0 64800 seconds After getting Intercom dial tone a multiline terminal user has this interval to dial the first digit of the ...

Page 480: ... 1 or disable 0 the extension s ability to automatically send off hook Signals while busy on a handset call Setting this option to 0 will prevent Intercom calls from providing Off Hook Signaling instead the caller will hear a busy signal 80 01 01 Service Tone Setup Tone 28 Speaker Monitor Tone This tone changes the tone the originator of an ICM call hears The tone cannot be changed for what is hea...

Page 481: ... number port number and extension Department Group You can also check any other extension numbers information y pressing Help the extension number 3 Press Exit to return the normal time date display To change how Intercom calls ring your extension 1 Press the Speaker key or lift the handset 2 Dial 723 to have calls ring your extension OR 3 Dial 721 to have calls voice announce to your extension ...

Page 482: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 460 Intercom THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 483: ... simple installation The HUB 8 U ETU is an in skin fast Ethernet switching hub unit that provides the following services Basic LAN Settings J Auto Negotiation This feature can allow deny Auto Negotiation for port speed and duplex mode for each port When this function is allowed the HUB 8 U ETU negotiates with linked equipment to determine the speed 10Mbps or 100Mbps and operating duplex mode Full ...

Page 484: ... the congested port may again send collision detection signals or accept the incoming frames if ready J Flow Control For congestion on a full duplex port the ETU supports IEEE 802 3x flow control that allows a device to momentarily stop the flow of traffic from a transmitting device by sending a pause frame Port Mirroring J For troubleshooting network issues with a protocol analyzer port mirroring...

Page 485: ...Electra Elite IPK II Document Revision 1 Internal Hub 2 463 Related Features None Programming None Operation None ...

Page 486: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 464 Internal Hub THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 487: ...le real time media supports industry standard MEGACO H 248 communication on the WAN side and interfaces with the Electra Elite IPK as a regular Electronic Station Interface board ESI 8 U ETU From the network administration perspective the IAD ETU is an end point on the IP network This interface can provide J MEGACO H 248 signaling Protocol J DTMF generation J RTP port number designation J ToS fiel...

Page 488: ...ta network compared to an Intranet using this application in Intranet WAN environment with known or controlled and assured Quality of Service QoS is highly recommended J When any network where the IAD 8 U ETU or any of its IP terminals is connected uses NAT for connecting the voice calls including firewall consulting your network provider administrator to specifically request service for VoIP or r...

Page 489: ...er programmable ringing options Group listening is not supported by MEGACO IP stations Station Relocation is not supported by MEGACO IP stations or IPK Soft Phones Not all data networks are suitable to support Voice over Internet Protocol VoIP A good VoIP network solution requires low latency low jitter and low packet loss Accordingly the network must be evaluated for these factors to determine wh...

Page 490: ...ed Power over Ethernet POE is not provided IP Terminals must be updated to release 1 25 or higher to support this application IP Terminals must be updated to release 1 23 or higher to support this application Related Features None Programming 11 02 01 Extension Numbering Assign extension numbers to extension ports The telephone s programming identity follows the port number not the extension numbe...

Page 491: ...Media Gateway Controller assigned in the Electra Elite IPK II This determination will be made in KSU Programming 84 05 03 Master Slave determination The Media Gateway Controller performs the duties of interpreting UDP signaling messages between the Elite IPK II Processor and IP Stations Any additional MG16 ETUs added to the system will be known as Media Gateway cards The media gateway card control...

Page 492: ... to communicate on the same network This may require a second static IP Address for the IPK II CPU J The MG16 supports station to station direct RTP connections peer to peer for calls between IP Phones that provide the following benefits N Improved voice quality for calls between two IP Phones N Improved bandwidth performance for voice between IP Phones N Pad and echo canceller controls are built ...

Page 493: ...ation J TOS field QoS support J Tone generation J General Tone detection J G 711 and G 729a voice compression J 10 100 Base T LAN interface J Echo Canceller Conditions Group listening is not supported by MEGACO IP stations Station Relocation is not supported by MEGACO IP stations or IPK Soft Phones Not all data networks are suitable to support Voice over Internet Protocol VoIP A good VoIP network ...

Page 494: ...UNIT AC Adapter When in line power is used Power over Ethernet POE is not provided Related Features None Programming VoIP Settings When the PVA U ETU is first purchased it has a factory default package installed You will have to load the MG Application for the Elite IPK II KSU to recognize the VoIP MG16 ETU Reference the PVA U ETUs Firmware upgrade installation procedure 84 05 01 VOIP IP Address S...

Page 495: ...define the Media Gateway Card starting RTP Port Number default 10020 84 06 02 VOIP Setup RTCP Port Number Use this program to define the Media Gateway Card Starting RTCP Port Number The RTCP Port Number has to be the RTP port number 1 default 10021 84 06 04 VOIP Setup Fractlost Threshold Use this program to define the fractional lost threshold this data will be sent to the IPK II CPU when the valu...

Page 496: ...hrough 84 10 06 IP Precedence Use this program to define the IP Precedence data bit Typically only one of the bits 3 6 are set to 1 and the other three bits are set to 0 For example to maximize route reliability set 84 10 05 to 1 and leave 84 10 03 84 10 04 and 84 10 06 to be at default 0 default 0 84 10 07 Priority Diffserv Use this program to define the Diffserv decimal value valid values 0 63 d...

Page 497: ...nsion Numbering 11 02 01 Extension Numbering Use this program to define the IP Phone extension Number This designated extension will be used to register your IP Phone and will be programmed IP Phone programming Refer to the Installation Instructions for Installation Instructions for Elite ITH 4D 8D 16D 2 3 Dterm IPK Terminals and the IP R IPK Adapters IP Phone Codec Information Basic Setup 84 11 0...

Page 498: ...o define G 729 Jitter Buffer setting values are set in ms default 60ms 84 11 11 G729 Jitter Buffer Max Use this program to define G 729 Jitter Buffer maximum accepted value values are set in ms default 120ms 84 11 17 Jitter Buffer Mode Use this program to define the Jitter Buffer mode supported Static or Immediate default 2 Immediate 84 11 18 Voice Activity Detection Threshold Use this program to ...

Page 499: ...arty Consult the Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual for Transmit Gail scale to set acceptable value default 10 Operation Example Configuration 1 Static IP Addressing One LAN This example shows System IP Phones connected to a single LAN no routers with a static IP address Programming IPK II CPU 1 10 12 01 IPK II CPU Network Setup IP Address 192 168 1 20 2 10 12 02 IPK II CPU Network Setup Subn...

Page 500: ...0 Programming System IP Phones 1 DHCP Mode Disabled 2 IP Address 192 168 1 200 3 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 4 MGC Address 192 168 1 21 Ext 100 Example Configuration 2 Dynamic IP Addressing One LAN This example shows System IP Phones connected to a single LAN no routers with a dynamic IP address The DHCP server could be J Customer supplied i e Windows 2003 Server etc J Elite IPK II internal DHCP ser...

Page 501: ...s 192 168 1 20 2 10 12 02 IPK II CPU Network Setup Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Programming System IP Phones 1 DHCP Mode Enabled Figure 2 4 Example Dynamic IP Addressing One LAN IPK II CPU VOIP MG16 Switch Hub IP Phone 1 DHCP IP Phone 2 DHCP IPK II CPU 192 168 1 20 VoIP MG16 192 168 1 21 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 192 168 1 254 ...

Page 502: ...e Programming IPK II CPU 1 10 12 01 IPK II CPU Network Setup IP Address 192 168 1 20 2 10 12 02 IPK II CPU Network Setup Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 3 10 12 03 IPK II CPU Network Setup Default Gateway 192 168 1 254 Figure 2 5 Example Static IP Addressing Routed WAN IPK II CPU VoIP MG16 Switch Hub IP Phone 1 101 192 168 2 201 IPK II CPU 192 168 1 20 VoIP MG16 192 168 1 21 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 De...

Page 503: ...uired and the voice quality required CODECs J G 729 Low bandwidth requirement and is used on most Wide Area Network links J G 711 High bandwidth requirement usually used on Local Area Networks The Elite IPK II IP Phones have a preferred CODEC known as the Audio Capability Priority This is the CODEC that will be used when calls are initiated There are 5 Types profiles that can be created and assign...

Page 504: ...on Linear Processing Echo Canceller Mode default 1 Enable 16 84 11 22 Non Linear Processing Echo Canceller Mode default 1 Enable 17 84 11 22 TX Gain default 10 18 84 11 22 RX Gain default 10 84 11 28 Dterm IP Codec Information Settings Audio Priority For each Type set the codec to use default G 711 By default all IP Phones belong in Type 1 To change the Type for an IP Phone 15 05 15 IP Phone Termi...

Page 505: ...ther or not music should be provided Configuring IP Phones From a powered IP Phone enter the telephone s program mode by pressing Hold Conf This enters the IP User Menu program mode to select the settings for the individual telephone Figure 2 6 IP Phone Programming LAN Ethernet PC Straight through patch cable Straight through patch cable IP Telephone or IP Adapter AC Adapter Not required if PoE is...

Page 506: ...Static IP Address for the IP Phone 3 Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Enter the subnet Mask Address 4 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 Enter your Default Gateway address 5 Speed Duplex Auto 6 MGC Address 0 0 0 0 Enter the Media Gateway Controller IP Address When Multiple MG16 ETU are entered only the MG16 configured as MASTER in Data Program 84 05 03 will be set as MGC IP Address 7 EXT 0 Assign the IP Phones extension ...

Page 507: ...ter with an RAS Server and use Gatekeeper for dynamic call routing The IAD 8 U10 ETU H 323 is an optional interface that can provide IP trunks and tie lines It can operate in the following modes J COI J COID J DID J TLI J DTI Depending on the requirements and resource allocation in the LAN WAN Internet the IAD 8 U10 ETU H 323 can be configured to use any of the following voice compressions J G 711...

Page 508: ...01 is set to 2 DTMF For the IAD trunks this must be set for Dial Pulse either 0 10PPS or 1 20PPS 14 05 01 Trunk Group Number 44 02 01 ARS F Route Access Dial 44 02 02 ARS F Route Access Service Type 44 02 03 ARS F Route Access Additional Data 44 05 01 ARS F Route Table Trunk Group Number IAD 8 U assigned as DTI will be allocated 24 trunk ports but can only use the first eight ports The remaining t...

Page 509: ...Internet using CO lines to another gateway The IAD 8 U10 ETU SIP is an optional interface that can provide IP trunks and tie lines It can operate in the following modes J COI J COID J DID J TLI J DTI Depending on the requirements and resource allocation in the LAN WAN Internet the IAD 8 U10 ETU SIP can be configured to use any of the following voice compressions J G 711 Mu Law Highest Bandwidth J ...

Page 510: ...als Required Component s IAD 8 U10 ETU SIP package Related Features None Programming 10 03 01 ETU Setup 11 01 01 System Numbering 14 02 01 Signaling Type DP DTMF At default 14 02 01 is set to 2 DTMF For the IAD trunks this must be set for Dial Pulse either 0 10PPS or 1 20PPS 14 05 01 Trunk Group Number 44 02 01 ARS F Route Access Dial 44 02 02 ARS F Route Access Service Type ...

Page 511: ...3 ARS F Route Access Additional Data 44 05 01 ARS F Route Table Trunk Group Number IAD 8 U assigned as DTI will be allocated 24 trunk ports but can only use the first eight ports The remaining trunk ports should be assigned to Trunk Group 0 44 05 09 ARS F Route Table Maximum Digits Operation None ...

Page 512: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 490 IP Trunk SIP Session Initiation Protocol THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 513: ...routing to the called extension s mailbox This gives the transferring party the option of retrieving the call instead of having it go directly to the mailbox J Leaving a Message Voice Mail lets a multiline terminal extension user easily leave a message at an extension that is unanswered busy or in Do Not Disturb The caller just presses their Voice Mail key to leave a message in the called extensio...

Page 514: ...together closely such as members of the same Department Hunt Group or ACD Group For example an ACD Group Supervisor can send important messages to the shared Message Center Mailbox to which any ACD Group member can respond when time allows Each ACD Agent s Message Center Key flashes when messages are waiting The Message Center Mailbox can be a mailbox for an installed uninstalled or virtual extens...

Page 515: ... models J FM128 2 provides two Voice Mail ports eight hours of message storage and up to 160 mailboxes requires a DSPDBU J FM128 4 provides four Voice Mail ports eight hours of message storage and up to 160 mailboxes requires a DSPDBU The In Mail Automated Attendant answers incoming calls and routes them quickly and efficiently Integrated Voice Mail features include Conversation Record Answering M...

Page 516: ...ion number of the person they wish to reach just their name Here s how Directory Dialing works 1 When the Automated Attendant answers it sends the call to a Directory Dialing Mailbox Optionally the caller may be asked to dial a digit to access Directory Dialing 2 The Directory Dialing Mailbox plays the Directory Dialing Message which asks the caller to dial letters for the name of the person they ...

Page 517: ...ls on setting these features Conditions The Park and Page feature is not available with In Mail Conversation Record will not work for monitored calls Fixed Call Forwarding can be used to transfer a user s unanswered calls to their voice mail Call Forwarding does not have to be programmed manually by every user Caller ID information will be passed from the Voice Mail to an extension for pre answer ...

Page 518: ... Mail In Mail and Analog voice mail cannot be used at the same time in the same system In Mail does not support Elite IPKII Centralized Voice Mail Default Setting Disabled System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s DSPDB FM128 4 FM128 2 ...

Page 519: ...ver for every 10 devices that use them H In heavy traffic sites allocate one DTMF receiver for every five devices that use them 11 07 01 Department Group Pilot Numbers Assign a Department Group pilot number for the Voice Mail 8 digits maximum The extensions are assigned to the group in Program 16 02 01 11 12 52 Service Code Setup for Service Access Define access code used for In Mail Live Monitori...

Page 520: ...or a virtual extension H A co worker s extension number if you are setting up a Message Center key for an installed extension H An uninstalled extension s number if you are setting up a Message Center key for an uninstalled extension Optional Assign a Voice Mail Record key to an extension code 78 Optional Assign a Personal Answering Machine Emulation key code 16 Optional Use a Call Redirect key 49...

Page 521: ...mended that these options be set to off 0 for the voice mail COS 20 13 13 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Continued Dialing Enable Continued Dialing 1 for all extensions that will dial Voice Mail features 20 13 15 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Barge In Initiate It is recommended that these options be set to on 1 for the voice mail COS 22 01 04 System Options for Inc...

Page 522: ...nt Group number is to be assigned as the voice mail group An entry of 0 means there is no voice mail installed Department Groups 0 1 64 45 01 02 Voice Mail Integration Options Voice Mail Master Name Enter the Voice Mail master name up to 12 characters 45 01 03 Voice Mail Integration Options Voice Mail Screening Enable 1 or disable 0 the system s ability to process the Call Screening commands 1 ext...

Page 523: ...F Tone Receiver Setup 80 04 01 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup Use these programs to set the criteria for DTMF dial ringback and busy tones Operation Calling Your Mailbox To call your mailbox With a multiline terminal our Voice Mail key flashes green and your Message Center keys flash red when they have messages waiting If you do not have a Voice Mail key your MW LED flashes instead Multiline Te...

Page 524: ...re both voice mail messages and Message Waiting calls the display indicates the number of new voice mail messages and then each Message Waiting call is shown When there are new messages the MW LED on the telephone will flash red To return a displayed Message Waiting press the Speaker key or lift the handset 2 To return a displayed Message Waiting press the Speaker key or lift the handset To listen...

Page 525: ...e 11 743 Call Forward No Answer PGM 15 07 or SC 751 code 12 744 Call Forward Busy No Answer PGM 15 07 or SC 751 code 13 2 Dial the Voice Mail master number 3 Press the Speaker key to hang up or hang up handset at the single line telephone Transferring Calls to a Mailbox To transfer your active call to a mailbox Multiline Terminal 1 Press Hold 2 Press the Voice Mail key PGM 15 07 or SC 751 code 77 ...

Page 526: ...estination is an extension forwarded to Voice Mail the call waits before routing the called user s mailbox This gives you the option of retrieving the call instead of having it picked up by Voice Mail 2 Hang up Recording Your Call To record your active call in your mailbox Multiline Terminal 1 Press the Voice Mail Record key PGM 15 07 or SC 751 code 78 You hear a beep and your Record key flashes T...

Page 527: ...ll Forward Busy No Answer 745 Call Forward Both Ring 746 Call Forwarding Follow Me 2 Dial the Voice Mail master number 3 Press the Speaker key to hang up or hang up handset at the single line telephone When Personal Answering Machine Emulation broadcasts your caller s message you can Your telephone must be idle not on a call 1 Do nothing The message is automatically being recorded in your mailbox ...

Page 528: ...1 Log onto the System Administrator s mailbox SA 72 or press 0 to play a Help message 2 Select Instruction Menus I 4 3 Enter the Directory Dialing Mailbox number or press to go back to the System Administrator Options 4 Select one of the following options L 5 Listen to the current Directory Dialing Message if any Exit listen mode R 7 Record a new Directory Dialing Message Q Pause or restart record...

Page 529: ...ish to reach N The Directory Dialing Message will tell you how many letters you need to dial and whether you should enter the person s first name or last name N To exit Directory Dialing without selecting a name just dial 3 The Automated Attendant will announce the name matches and tell you which digit to dial 1 3 to reach each of the announced names N To hear additional name matches if any dial 6...

Page 530: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 508 IPK II In Mail THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 531: ...ite PC Assistant Application Software This application runs on a PC and provides the PC based GUI Graphical User Interface and features 2 Telephony Admin This is a application which interfaces between the PC Assistant and the 3rd party TAPI drivers 3 CTU CTA Adapter This adapter is installed on the multiline telephone and interfaces the Electra Elite IPK II KSU with the USB Universal Serial Bus or...

Page 532: ...fault Setting Not Applicable System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals Required Component s PC running Windows XP 2000 PC Assistant Client License 3rd Party TAPI Drivers IPKII TSP Red Phoenix Telephony Admin CTI Server Optional Component s CTU installed on a NEC Multiline Terminal Related Features Refer to the IPK II PC Assistant manual for detailed feature information Programming 10 1...

Page 533: ...LAN Settings External Equipment 1 Select the TCP port number to be used by the Telephony Admin on the CTI Server 8181 is recommended In addition to the above programming define the programming options as required for the system features Refer to the IPK II Programming Manual for programming details Callback Callback Request and Auto Redial are not supported Operation Refer to the IPK II PC Assista...

Page 534: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 512 IPK II PC Assistant THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 535: ...ng placing calls The CTI service on the PC communicates with the IPK II system through the CTI port on the telephone system An administration utility Telephony Administrator is provided which allows the system administrator to configure the global settings for the console application The PC Attendant application can also be installed on multiple PCs for installations that need to support more than...

Page 536: ...0 255 10 12 02 Subnet Mask IPK II Subnet Mask 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 10 12 03 Default Gateway IPK II Default Gateway 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 10 20 01 External Equipment LAN Settings External Equipment 1 Select the TCP port number to be used by the PC Attendant 8181 is recommended In addition to the above programming define the programming options as required for the system features Refer to the I...

Page 537: ...gured for DID Line Service the trunks emulate Loop Start or Ground Start trunks for outgoing calls and DID trunks for incoming calls J Calling Line Identification Presentation CLIP 10 03 05 ETU Configuration CLIP Information Announcement will allow the Calling Party Number IE in the Setup Message for a call when placed out an ISDN Trunk J Calling Party Number CPN Presentation from Station Calling ...

Page 538: ...o sends the information to the system in the Facility Disconnect or Release Message When the system receives a Facility Message it sends back Disconnect or Release then releases the trunks When the system receives a Disconnect or Release the system simply releases the trunks the other trunk will also receive a Disconnect or Release If the transfer fails the Telco sends the system Facility message ...

Page 539: ...upports receiving the name from the Network in supported formats only and cannot send the Calling Name Refer to the following table CO Line Service is not supported ISDN PRI cannot be configured for CO Emulation B Channel to Trunk Association When an Incoming ISDN BRI PRI call is received the system will assign the lowest trunk number of the ISDN circuit to the incoming call associated with the B ...

Page 540: ...Talking on TK009 10 2 11 3 12 4 13 5 14 6 15 7 16 8 17 9 18 10 19 11 20 12 21 13 22 14 31 23 Incoming call from the Network on Channel 23 In most cases the Network will control select the B Channel used for an incoming call Incoming Call Trunk Number B Channel Number ...

Page 541: ... call is automatically transferred to another trunk by system programming such as Call Forward Off Premise J The bearer capability of the two calls must be Speech 3 1 kHz Audio Unrestricted Digital information or compatible Outgoing Call Trunk Number Trunk Group Trunk Priority B Channel Number 9 1 9 1 10 1 8 2 11 1 7 3 12 1 6 4 13 1 5 5 14 1 4 6 15 1 3 7 16 1 2 8 Station user 17 1 1 9 places outgo...

Page 542: ...ports when it is connected to a CO line Each SPID is assigned to a different TEI This relationship is made in the initialization of the BRI line when it is connected to the CO This relationship between SPID and TEI s are created as follows LOGICAL PORT NUMBER 0 SPID 1 LOGICAL PORT NUMBER 1 SPID 2 When using the SMDR reports for BRI all incoming BRI calls will be displayed under the CLASS column as...

Page 543: ... Additional Directory Numbers with no new terminating equipment only a dialable number When you want Additional Directory Numbers to hunt when a B Channel is busy the service may be called Busy Diversion Default Setting None System Availability Terminals Not Applicable Required Component s To provide ISDN PRI trunk connection DTI U40 ETU To provide ISDN BRI trunk connection BRT 4 U20 ETU NT 1 for ...

Page 544: ...rm the Basic Configuration data for each BRT 4 U20 ETU Use this program to select the ISDN Line Mode 0 Not Set 1 T Bus Default 10 03 03 ETU Setup Connection Type Setup and confirm the Basic Configuration data for each BRT 4 U20 ETU Confirm the connection type for or each BRT 4 U20 ETU 0 Point to Multipoint Default 1 Point to Point 10 03 04 ETU Setup Layer 3 Timer Type Setup and confirm the Basic C...

Page 545: ...values to the BRI Circuit 0 Select by SPID number Default 1 Select by Channel ID number 10 06 02 ISDN BRI Setup DID Mode Select the method the system will use when assigning DID Mode to the BRI Circuit 0 Route by Called Party Number default 1 Route by Redirecting Number 10 06 03 ISDN BRI Setup SPID 1 Assign the SPID Number for B Channel 1 maximum of 20 Digits allowed 10 06 04 ISDN BRI Setup SPID 2...

Page 546: ...confirm the Basic Configuration data for each DTI U40 ETU Select either enblock or overlap sending 0 Enblock Sending 1 Overlap Sending Default 10 03 09 ETU Setup Dial Information Element Setup and confirm the Basic Configuration data for each DTI U40 ETU If Overlap Sending is selected in Program 10 03 08 select either Keypad Facility 0 or Called Party Number 1 for the dial information element 21 1...

Page 547: ...t Inward Dialing DID on page 2 285 Calling Party Number Presentation for either ISDN BRI or PRI Calling Line Identification Presentation CLIP 10 03 05 ETU Setup CLIP Information Based on this setting the system will include a Presentation Allowed 1 or Presentation Restricted 0 in the Setup message to allow or deny the Calling Party Number Program 15 01 04 must also be set to a 1 if this option is ...

Page 548: ... for the ISDN trunk defined in Program 21 13 If a Calling Party Number is assigned in both Programs 21 12 and 21 13 the system sends the data in Program 21 13 SMDR Dialed Digits for either ISDN BRI or PRI 35 02 15 SMDR Output Options CLI DID Number Determine if the CLI DID Number should be displayed 0 Caller ID Number Default 1 DID Calling Number 2 Caller ID Name 35 02 16 SMDR Output Options Trunk...

Page 549: ... 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class of Service to extensions 20 09 02 Class of Service Options Incoming Call Service Caller ID Display In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 the extension s ability to display incoming Caller ID name number information 20 09 03 Class of Service Options Incoming Call Service Sub Address Identification Define whether an extension disp...

Page 550: ...stablish a PRI trunk call 2 Press Hold 3 Establish or answer a second PRI trunk call 4 Press Transfer PGM 15 07 or SC 751 06 to perform the trunk to trunk transfer 5 If the transfer is successful the B Channel is released If the transfer failed the trunks remain active on the Electra Elite IPK II system ...

Page 551: ...200m Yes No In 10 03 08 enter 0 In 10 03 08 enter 1 Overlap Enblock In 10 03 09 select either Keypad Facility 0 or Called Party Number 1 for the dial information element Go To A In 14 05 01 assign PRI lines to trunk groups determines available channels for PRI lines Is the amount of time the system waits before placing the call in a talk state sufficient Is the Dial Sending Mode Enblock or Overlap...

Page 552: ...ice in 20 06 01 Yes Should all PRI Trunks ring the same extensions In 22 02 01 enter 3 Refer to the Elite IPK II Manual for DID programming No In 22 02 01 enter 0 Yes No In 22 05 01 assign all the trunks on a PRI ETU to the same Ring Group In 14 07 01 and 15 06 01 set up the trunk Access Maps for PRI trunks Go to B Should extension ring for incoming calls on PRI trunk In 22 04 01 do not assign ext...

Page 553: ... change the way PRI calls ring telephones Change the Ring Tone Range in 22 03 01 and 15 02 02 the tones within each range in 82 01 01 and the ring cadence in 20 15 01 Yes For ringing extensions should extension ring when line key starts flashing or wait for the system ring cycle In 10 08 01 enter 1 to enable pre ringing for trunk calls In 10 08 01 enter 0 to disable pre ringing for trunk calls Wai...

Page 554: ...ity 0 or Called Party Number 1 for the dial information element Go To A Is the Dial Sending Mode Enblock or Overlap Sending Is the CRC Multi Frame CRC4 used Should system users be able to place outgoing calls on trunks 20 08 02 enter 1 to enable outgoing calls In 20 08 02 enter 0 to disable outgoing calls Yes No In 20 06 01 assign Class of Service to extensions Stop Should telco display the callin...

Page 555: ...nks Do you need to restrict certain extensions from placing calls on certain trunks In 14 07 01 for each Access Map select the access options for each trunk In 15 06 01 assign extensions to Access Maps Build an outgoing restriction matrix In the default program extensions have full access to all trunks Yes No Yes Should caller hear DTMF confirmation tones as they are dialing a trunk call In 14 01 ...

Page 556: ...it and 14 01 03 receive Check the Analog Trunk Timers in 81 01 for compatibility with the telco If desired assign names to trunks in 14 01 01 Do you want to set up an Alternate Trunk Route Access Code Stop In 11 01 01 set up a Service Code for Alternate Trunk Route Access No Yes No Yes Yes No See CAP Key in the Feature Specification manual for more details Trunks No Yes No For example to make 50 t...

Page 557: ...munication costs can be reduced This feature is available between Electra Elite IPK II systems and NEAX PBX systems When connecting to a NEAX system IPT cards are used and must be installed The following K CCIS features are available with the IP K CCIS to NEAX Point to Multipoint feature J Call Forwarding All Calls K CCIS J Call Forwarding Busy No Answer K CCIS J Call Transfer All Calls K CCIS J C...

Page 558: ... ETU a maximum of six IAD 8 U ETUs can be installed For an Expanded Port Package a maximum of 22 IAD 8 U ETUs can be installed If the IAD 8 U ETUs are assigned as CCISoIP ETUs maximum of 22 IAD 8 U ETUs can be installed The IAD 8 U10 supports only those codecs that are approved to provide toll quality speech paths The following voice compression methods are supported for the IP CCH for NEAX applic...

Page 559: ...llows Point to Multipoint peer to peer connections for calls through the IP K CCIS Network If a call is transferred or forwarded to a different system in the Network the trunks in the transferring system are released and a new Point to Point connection is established When a call terminates back to the originating system due to call forwarding or transfer the intermediate trunks are not released un...

Page 560: ...e announce is not supported for a forwarded call across IP K CCIS to NEAX Point to Multipoint This feature is not available when using 6 or 7 digit station numbers This feature and the IP K CCIS feature are not supported within the same network Not all data networks are suitable to support Voice over Internet Protocol VoIP A good VoIP solution will require a low latency low jitter and low packet l...

Page 561: ...ectra Elite IPK II Document Revision 1 K CCIS IP with IAD 2 539 Related Features Voice Over IP Station MEGACO IAD Programming Refer to the IPK II K CCIS Manual Operation Refer to the IPK II K CCIS Manual ...

Page 562: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 540 K CCIS IP with IAD THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 563: ...uced This feature is available between Electra Elite IPK II systems and NEAX PBX systems When connecting to a NEAX system IPT cards are used and must be installed The following K CCIS features are available with the IP K CCIS to NEAX Point to Multipoint feature J Call Forwarding All Calls K CCIS J Call Forwarding Busy No Answer K CCIS J Call Transfer All Calls K CCIS J Calling Name Display K CCIS ...

Page 564: ... a maximum of 11 PVA U ETUs can be installed If the PVA U ETUs are assigned as CCISoIP ETUs a maximum of 11 PVA U ETUs can be installed The PVA U ETU supports only those codecs that are approved to provide toll quality speech paths The following voice compression methods are supported for the IP CCH for NEAX application G 711 uLaw highest bandwidth G 729 mid range bandwidth G 723 lowest bandwidth ...

Page 565: ...ltipoint peer to peer connections for calls through the IP K CCIS Network If a call is transferred or forwarded to a different system in the Network the trunks in the transferring system are released and a new Point to Point connection is established When a call terminates back to the originating system due to call forwarding or transfer the intermediate trunks are not released until the call is c...

Page 566: ...d call across IP K CCIS to NEAX Point to Multipoint This feature is not available when using 6 or 7 digit station numbers This feature and the IP K CCIS feature are not supported within the same network Not all data networks are suitable to support Voice over Internet Protocol VoIP A good VoIP solution will require a low latency low jitter and low packet loss network Accordingly a network must be ...

Page 567: ...ctra Elite IPK II Document Revision 1 K CCIS IP with PVA 2 545 Related Features Voice Over IP Station MEGACO MG 16 Programming Refer to the IPK II K CCIS Manual Operation Refer to the IPK II K CCIS Manual ...

Page 568: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 546 K CCIS IP with PVA THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 569: ...ay Centralized Voice Mail Integration or Link Reconnect The following features are provided J Call Forwarding All Calls K CCIS J Call Forwarding Busy No Answer K CCIS J Call Park Retrieve K CCIS J Call Transfer All Calls K CCIS J Calling Name Display K CCIS J Calling Number Display K CCIS J Calling Party Number CPN Presentation from Station K CCIS J Centralized Billing K CCIS J Centralized BLF K C...

Page 570: ...S is required the Electra Elite IPK II uses the ARS F Route Tables The Electra Elite IPK II uses the F Route Tables to assign an Open Numbering Plan When all K CCIS voice channels are busy the Electra Elite IPK II originator of a K CCIS call hears a busy tone from the system Outgoing CO calls in a K CCIS network can be routed over the K CCIS link and use the distant system CO lines Distant system ...

Page 571: ...ork should never have more than five hops tandem connections because of the message delay through each tandem system A Star topology network supports only five systems because of the CCH channels in the Main Hub system A Tree topology network is supported The maximum number of systems depends on the Numbering Plan used and the maximum number of hops tandem connections A Mesh topology network is no...

Page 572: ... Plan using F Routes is used This feature is not supported by the TLI 2 U Analog Line interface Only one CCH 4 U ETU can be assigned per system Extension numbers cannot start with 0 or 9 Internal Calls transferred calls and K CCIS calls do not provide Caller ID to single line telephones Caller ID Call Return feature is not supported with K CCIS calls Default Setting Not installed System Availabili...

Page 573: ...lite IPK II Document Revision 1 K CCIS T1 2 551 Related Features T1 Trunking with ANI DNIS Compatibility Universal Slots Programming Refer to the IPK II K CCIS manual Operation Refer to the IPK II K CCIS manual ...

Page 574: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 552 K CCIS T1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 575: ...s the same trunk group as for the initial call However the extension user can preselect a specific trunk if desired When pressing the Redial key the display indicates REDIAL SYS The user can then press to redial the number displayed or enter an System Speed Dialing bin number to be dialed Pressing the Redial key repeatedly will scroll through the last 10 numbers dialed Conditions Redial List requi...

Page 576: ...2 13 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Redial List Mode Select the type of numbers that will be stored in the Redial List Internal and External numbers 0 or External only 1 Operation To redial your last call 1 Without lifting the handset press the Redial key The last dialed number is displayed 2 To redial the last number press OR Search for the desired number from the Redial List by pressing th...

Page 577: ...3 Dial 5 The system automatically selects a trunk from the same group as your original call and dials the last number dialed To check the number saved for Last Number Redial 1 Press the Redial key The stored number displays for six seconds The stored number dials out if you Lift the handset Press an idle line key or Press Speaker 2 Press the Exit key To erase the stored number 1 At the multiline t...

Page 578: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 556 Last Number Redial THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 579: ...ars Intercom dial tone when they lift the handset If a multiline terminal has Outgoing Trunk Line Preference the user hears trunk dial tone when they lift the handset Outgoing Line Preference also determines what happens at extensions with Idle Line Preference The user hears either trunk dial 9 or Intercom dial tone Auto Answer of Non Ringing Lines With Auto Answer of Non Ringing Lines an extensio...

Page 580: ...ne Ring Groups Trunk Group Routing Programming 14 05 01 Trunk Groups For Auto Answer of Non Ringing Lines assign trunks to trunk groups This is part of Trunk Group Routing programming Trunks 1 100 14 06 01 Trunk Group Routing For Auto Answer of Non Ringing Lines program the Trunk Group Routing table Auto Answer uses this table to determine the answer sequence for ringing calls Trunk Groups 1 100 ...

Page 581: ... Access Maps to extensions Trunk Access Maps 1 200 20 10 07 Class of Service Options Answer Service Automatic Answer of Universal Calls Enable 1 or disable 0 an extension s ability to use Universal Auto Answer for non ringing lines 22 01 01 System Options for Incoming Calls Incoming Call Priority Determine if ringing Intercom calls 0 or ringing trunk calls 1 should have answer priority See the tab...

Page 582: ...oute that it will use for Auto Answer for Non Ringing Lines The routes correspond to the Trunk Group Routing table set in Program 14 06 Trunk Group Routes 1 100 Operation Ringing Trunk or intercom ICM call Lift the handset or press the Speaker key The setting assigned for 15 02 10 and 22 01 01 determines which call is answered first ...

Page 583: ...ing Tone for Long Conversation feature the system can provide a warning tone on outgoing trunks calls before the call is disconnected Conditions Long Conversation Cutoff can disconnect incoming and outgoing CO calls after a set time period Long conversation cutoff is controlled separately for DISA and tie lines Using the Warning Tone for Long Conversation feature allows users on outgoing calls to ...

Page 584: ...tensions 20 13 02 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Long Conversation Cutoff Incoming Enable 1 or disable 0 an extension s class of service from using Long Conversation Cutoff for incoming calls 20 13 03 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Long Conversation Cutoff Outgoing Enable 1 or disable 0 an extension s class of service from using Long Conversation Cutoff for outgoing...

Page 585: ... a telephone meeting without leaving the office The CPU provides two blocks of 32 conference circuits allowing each block to have any number of internal or external parties conferenced up to the block s limit of 32 Conditions Each block assigned in Program 10 07 for Conversation Recording reduces the number of blocks available for Conference Recording ACD Agent Auto Call Recording and ACD Supervis...

Page 586: ...e for Extensions Assign a Class Of Service 1 15 to an extension 20 10 06 Class of Service Options Answer Service Meet Me Conference and Paging In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 an extension s ability to initiate a Meet Me Conference or Meet Me Page 31 01 04 System Options for Internal External Paging Privacy Release Time Set the Privacy Release Time 0 64800 seconds Once the ...

Page 587: ...rs your page press hookflash twice 5 Repeat steps 1 4 for each co worker you want to add To join a Meet Me External Conference 1 At the multiline terminal press the Speaker key OR At a single line telephone lift the handset 2 Dial 765 3 Dial the announced External Paging Zone code 0 8 You connect to the other parties Meet Me Internal Conference To make a Meet Me Internal Conference Multiline Termi...

Page 588: ...answers your page press hookflash twice 5 Repeat steps 1 4 for each co worker you want to add To join a Meet Me Internal Conference 1 At the multiline terminal press the Speaker key or lift the handset OR At the single line telephone lift the handset 2 Dial 763 if your extension is in the zone called OR Dial 764 and the zone number if your extension is not in the zone called OR Press the Meet Me C...

Page 589: ...s a good way to talk to a co worker when their location is unknown If the co worker can hear the Page they can join in the conversation Conditions With Meet Me Paging Transfer a user can page a co worker and have the call automatically transfer when the co worker answers the page An extension s access to internal and external page zones affects the Meet Me Paging feature Internal and External Pagi...

Page 590: ...e Paging Pickup code 23 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class Of Service 1 15 to an extension 20 10 06 Class of Service Options Answer Service Meet Me Conference and Paging In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 an extension s ability to initiate a Meet Me Conference or Meet Me Page Operation Meet Me External Page To make a Meet Me External Page 1 At multiline t...

Page 591: ...al the announced External Paging Zone 0 8 You connect to the other party Meet Me Internal Page To make a Meet Me Internal Page 1 At the multiline terminal press the Speaker key or pick up the handset OR At the single line telephone lift the handset 2 Dial 701 and dial the Internal Paging Zone code 0 9 00 32 or 00 64 OR Dial 1 and the Combined Paging Zone code 1 8 for Internal External Zones 1 8 or...

Page 592: ... the Speaker key or pick up the handset OR At the single line telephone lift the handset 2 Dial 763 if your extension is in the zone called OR Dial 764 and the zone number if your extension is not in the zone called OR Press the Meet Me Conference Paging Pickup key PGM 15 07 or SC 751 23 if your extension is in the zone called ...

Page 593: ... extended to a co worker anywhere in the facility Conditions An extension user can set up a conference with their current call and up to 31 other inside parties An extension user can Page a co worker and meet with them on a page zone With External Paging an extension user can broadcast an announcement over paging equipment connected to external paging zones Internal Paging lets extension users bro...

Page 594: ...and Meet Me Conference Paging Pickup code 23 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class Of Service 1 15 to an extension 20 10 06 Class of Service Options Answer Service Meet Me Conference and Paging In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 an extension s ability to initiate a Meet Me Paging Transfer Operation Meet Me External Paging Transfer To make a Meet Me External ...

Page 595: ...ngle line telephone lift the handset 2 Dial 765 3 Dial the announced External Paging Zone 0 8 You connect to the Paging party 4 Stay on the line From a multiline terminal press the Transfer key or the Transfer softkey OR From a single line telephone hang up The party is transferred Meet Me Internal Paging Transfer To make a Meet Me Internal Paging Transfer 1 At multiline terminal while on a call p...

Page 596: ...ress the Speaker key or pick up handset OR At the single line telephone lift the handset 2 Dial 763 if your extension is in the zone called OR Dial 764 and the zone number if your extension is not in the zone called OR Press the Meet Me Conference Paging Pickup key PGM 15 07 or SC 751 23 if your extension is in the zone called 3 Stay on the line From a multiline terminal when the paged party answe...

Page 597: ...nters a Memo Dial number the dialed digits do not output over the trunk Dialing Memo Dial digits does not interfere with a call in progress Conditions When Memo Dial calls out it outdials the entire stored number Memo Dial does not automatically strip out trunk or PBX access codes if entered as part of the stored number Only one number can be stored at a time If there is already a number stored in...

Page 598: ... PGM 15 07 or SC 751 31 2 Dial number you want to store 3 Press Memo Dial key again and continue with conversation To call a stored Memo Dial number 1 Do not lift the handset 2 Press the Memo Dial key PGM 15 07 or SC 751 31 3 Press the Speaker key The stored number dials out only if you store a trunk access code before the number OR Press the line key The stored number dials out To check to see th...

Page 599: ...Electra Elite IPK II Document Revision 1 Memo Dial 2 577 To cancel erase a stored Memo Dial number 1 Press the Speaker key 2 Press the Memo Dial key PGM 15 07 or SC 751 31 ...

Page 600: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 578 Memo Dial THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 601: ...t they have Messages Waiting Message Key will Operate as Voice Mail Key The system enhances a telephone s Message key function when connected to a system which has voice mail installed When an extension receives a voice mail the Message key can be used to check the number of messages in voice mail as well as call the voice mail to listen to the messages If there is no Voice Mail Programmable Funct...

Page 602: ...er With the Hotel Motel set up an employee with a multiline terminal can send a Message Waiting to a room telephone if allowed in system programming A Message Waiting key simplifies this feature s operation Reminder messages require a DSP daughter board for Voice Response System VRS Telephone to telephone Message Waiting works when the voice mail is installed The MW Message Waiting LED may be used...

Page 603: ...the color set for Message Wait will override the color used for voice mail indications red 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Assign a function key for Message Waiting code 38 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class Of Service 1 15 to an extension 20 13 07 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Message Waiting In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 an ext...

Page 604: ...does not answer dial 0 or press your Message Waiting key to automatically leave them a message Normally your MW LED goes out If it continues to flash you have new messages in your Voice Mail mailbox or a new General Message Go to To check your messages below To cancel all your Messages Waiting This includes messages you have left for other extensions and messages other extension have left for you ...

Page 605: ... display 4 When you find the message you want to answer press the Speaker key You will either N Go to your Voice Mail mailbox N Listen to the new General Message N Automatically call the extension that left you a Message Waiting If you see You have VOICE MESSAGE n MESSAGE New messages in your Voice Mail mailbox CHECK MESSAGE VRS GENERAL MESSAGE A General message in Voice Mail that has not been hea...

Page 606: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 584 Message Waiting THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 607: ...t or pressing Speaker When using the Handset Transmission Cutoff key during an intercom call with the handset on hook you hear three beep tones and the LED is lit solid This also occurs when on an outside call When using the Handset Transmission Cutoff key during an intercom call with the handset off hook you hear three beep tones through the handset and the Handset Transmission Cutoff and MIC key...

Page 608: ... the setting for multiline terminal s handsfree microphone after being disconnected and reconnected If set to 0 the microphone will always be off when the terminal is reconnected If set to 1 the microphone remains in the same state it was in when the terminal is reconnected Operation To mute your telephone s handset or Handsfree microphone while on a call 1 Press MIC This only turns off the Handsf...

Page 609: ... can be set to the same Master Hunt Group and ports 5 8 can be set to a different Master Hunt Group using Program 11 07 01 Department Group Pilot Numbers and Program 16 02 01 Department Group Assignment for Extensions This allows two different Pilot Numbers for each conference OR If only one Pilot number is needed put all eight ports in one hunt group using Program 16 02 01 Department Group Assign...

Page 610: ...nference as type 1 to allow the SLT port the ability to receive DTMF tones after the initial call setup 16 01 08 Department Group Basic Data Setup Queuing for Department Group Call To have Department Group calls queue when busy set this entry to 1 for an extension or Conference group For no queuing enter 0 16 02 01 Department Group Assignment for Extensions Put all the CNF 8 U ETU extensions in a ...

Page 611: ...rd 4 8 digits To set the Conference 1 and or the Conference 2 Password 1 Call the Conference Bridge extension number and wait for the voice prompt 2 Dial the default Supervisor Password 0 0 0 0 then dial 3 Skip the steps until Conference Setup mode is available for conference 1 or conference 2 4 Follow the voice prompt and set the conference 1 or the conference 2 password 4 8 digits To record new ...

Page 612: ... or 2 password and dial 3 Start the conference To start a conference call on an incoming CO call using an Automated Attendant 1 Call a trunk that is set as an Automated Attendant 2 Select the option for an extension connected to the Conference Bridge 3 When the voice prompt is heard enter the Conference Bridge 1 or 2 password and dial 4 Start the conference To start a conference call from an incom...

Page 613: ...two 5 party J Four 4 party conferences J Password protection for each conference J Applicable voice messages and announcements e g Entry password request exit Advanced Mode J Password protection is provided for each conference J Applicable voice messages and announcements e g Entry password request exit are available J E mail notification when enabled requires the organizer to enter the E mail add...

Page 614: ...e starts when the last person joins the conference A scheduled conference with nine or more participants automatically disables the participant announce feature In Simple Mode all participants have the same conference password Default passwords are J Conference 1 111111 J Conference 2 222222 J Conference 3 333333 J Conference 4 444444 Custom Greeting is automatically enabled after the user accepts...

Page 615: ...articipants Fixed depending on CNF 16 U20 ETU configuration Selected by conference originator From 1 to 15 participants can be accommodated E Mail Notification N A Selected by originator per conference Admission Control N A Selected by originator per conference FUTURE Host Required N A Selected by originator per conference Conferences Scheduled by date and time N A Selected by originator per confe...

Page 616: ...lly sense the type straight or crossover of Ethernet cable used To ensure communication between the PC and the ETU they must be attached to the same network Related Features None Programming 11 02 01 Extension Numbering Set the extension number for each multimedia conference port 11 07 Department Group Pilot Number Assign a pilot number to the Multimedia Conference bridge department group 16 01 De...

Page 617: ...ial the Conference pilot number 2 Dial conference password and press 3 Record name at prompt and press 4 Enter the conference To join a conference from an outside location 1 Dial the number associated with the conference pilot number 2 Dial conference password and press 3 Record name at prompt and press 4 Enter the conference ...

Page 618: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 596 Multimedia Conference Bridge THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 619: ...system to provide communication between remote systems and facilities The system can receive and or transmit DTMF or DP signals on E M Tie Lines Ground Start Trunks Ground Start Trunks can be connected to the system Ground and Loop Start Trunks can be mixed in the system per trunk Ground Start Trunks are provided with line supervision to reduce call collisions Refer to the following table to see w...

Page 620: ...OI 8 U ETU has eight switches one for each port that can be used to select either Loop or Ground Start per trunk Each COIB 4 U10 ETU has four switches one for each port that can be used to select either Loop or Ground Start per trunk Ground Start Trunks do not support Caller ID ETU Caller ID CO Message Waiting Indication Pad Control Loop Start Ground Start Fax Branch COI 4 U 10 X X COI 8 U 10 X X ...

Page 621: ...599 Default Setting None System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s Any Trunk ETU Related Features Automatic Route Selection Call Appearance CAP Keys Caller ID Direct Inward Dialing DID ISDN Compatibility T1 Trunking with ANI DNIS Compatibility ...

Page 622: ...tion Select the DP Interdigit Time minimum pause time between Dial Pulses 81 10 02 Prepause Time Selection Specify the loop open time for a hookflash signal sent to the CO or PBX when the Recall key on a Multiline Terminal is pressed A Single Line Telephone SLT generates a hookflash to the CO or PBX line when a Single Line Telephone hookflash is assigned 81 10 03 Incoming Signal Detect Time Select...

Page 623: ...ce outgoing calls 14 02 01 Analog Trunk Data Setup Signaling Type DP DTMF Set the outgoing signaling type for the tie trunk The options are 0 DP 10 pps 1 DP 20 pps and 2 DTMF To set incoming signaling refer to Program 34 01 02 14 05 01 Trunk Groups Program tie lines of similar type into the same trunk group The system uses trunk groups for outgoing access to tie lines i e Service Code 704 group Al...

Page 624: ...s Common Permit Code Table 21 05 06 Toll Restriction Class Common Restrict Code Table 21 05 07 Toll Restriction Class Permit Code Table 21 05 08 Toll Restriction Class Restrict Code Table 21 05 09 Toll Restriction Class Restriction for Common Abbreviated Dialing 21 05 10 Toll Restriction Class Restriction for Group Abbreviated Dialing Numbers 21 05 11 Toll Restriction Class Intercom Call Restricti...

Page 625: ...e Lines Use this program to assign the trunk group route chosen when a user seizes a tie line and dials 9 Set Trunk Group Routing in program 14 06 01 If the system has ARS dialing 9 accesses ARS 34 04 01 E M Tie Line Toll Restriction Class If the system uses Toll Restriction enter a Toll Restriction Class 1 15 for each tie line The system uses the class you enter in Program 21 05 01 You cannot use...

Page 626: ...e Release Detect Time Selection Specify the before the circuit disconnect detected on the Tie line on the distant system side is recognized as Tie line release 81 11 05 Incoming Signal Detect Time Selection Specify the time after the incoming signal from another system is detected before the acknowledge signal is sent out 81 11 06 Loop Off Guard Time Selection Assign the loop off guard time to pre...

Page 627: ...on 1 Multiple Trunk Types 2 605 81 11 12 Automatic Release Signal Detection Selection Specify the signal detection time for release of a Tie line after a disconnect signal is received from the distant Central Office or PBX Operation None ...

Page 628: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 606 Multiple Trunk Types THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 629: ...unications systems NEC America NEC Unified Solutions Inc and NEC Infrontia hereby disclaim any liability arising out of the failure to obtain such a license Conditions External music on hold source for internal calls is only provided via audio input on the side of the KSU Program 10 04 01 is to be set for 1 External Source No music is provided to internal calls on hold via the ACI input Use the co...

Page 630: ...he ESIE 8 U20 ETU will not support a station or other hardware it is used by the PGD 2 U10 ADP for channel 2 When a ESIB 8 U20 ETU is installed without an ESIE 8 U20 ETU installed a PGD 2 U10 ADP installed on ports 1 8 will be recognized but only channel 1 on the PGD 2 U10 ADP is supported Channel 2 is not available ESIB 8 U10 ETUs and ESIE 8 U10 ETUs do not support the PGD 2 U10 ADP A maximum of ...

Page 631: ... 04 01 enter 1 In 10 04 03 adjust the audio gain setting 1 63 In 14 08 01 enter 2 In 11 06 01 assign an extension number to the ACI port Select a number outside the normal extension number range e g 400 In 33 02 01 assign ACI software ports 1 96 to an ACI Department Group 1 16 Is the MOH gain acceptable Stop In 10 21 01 set the external relay to 1 In 14 08 02 enter the ACI source port number 1 96 ...

Page 632: ...nter the ACI source port number 1 96 33 01 01 ACI Port Type Setup If ACI software port is designated for MOH in 14 08 01 set port s function to 1 input 80 01 01 Service Tone Setup Music On Hold Tone Service Tone 64 If required change the tone heard by the user when placed on hold when Program 10 04 01 set to 2 When Using a PGD 2 U10 ADP 10 03 01 ETU Setup Terminal Type If a PGD 2 U10 ADP is used f...

Page 633: ...y reach an available ACI software port within the group ACI Groups 1 16 33 01 01 ACI Port Type Setup Set each ACI software ports for input 1 or input output 2 Use input ports for Music on Hold sources Use output ports for External Paging Ringer Control ACI Ports 1 96 33 02 01 ACI Department Calling Group Assign ACI software ports to an ACI Department Group This lets ACI callers connect to ACI soft...

Page 634: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 612 Music on Hold THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 635: ...isting of alphanumeric characters punctuation marks and spaces Additional Characters Available When using the Name Storing feature the system now provides additional characters which can be used These characters are available with any option which allows Name Storing Speed Dial System Group Station One Touch Keys Extension Name Trunk Naming Conditions Display telephones use extension names for Dir...

Page 636: ...Service Trunk Name Display Incoming In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 the displaying of a trunk s name number when the trunk is ringing Operation Refer to Table 2 13 Keys for Entering Names for and explanation for using the keypad to enter names Table 2 13 Keys for Entering Names Use this keypad digit When you want to 1 Enter characters 1 _ Æ Á À Â Ã Ç É Ê ì ó 2 Enter charac...

Page 637: ...s on the same key are needed ex TOM Pressing again Space In system programming mode use the right arrow Softkey instead to accept and or add a space CONF Clear the character entry one character at a time HOLD Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to the right Table 2 13 Keys for Entering Names Continued Use this keypad digit When you want to ...

Page 638: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 616 Name Storing THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 639: ...tly Assigned Night Answer provides an answering point for Night Service calls For certain applications this may be more appropriate than Universal Night Answer For example you could program trunks to ring the security station telephone during off hours Universal Night Answer UNA Universal Night Answer makes incoming calls ring over the External Paging speakers With UNA an employee can go to a tele...

Page 640: ...unction Key must be set to 0 for the toggle function to work Conditions Almost all features are affected by Night Mode except for the following J Dial Tone Detection J External Alarm Sensors J Flexible System Numbering J Pulse to Tone conversion J SMDR J Volume Control Call Arrival CAR Keys and Virtual Extension keys do not support Day Night Mode 09 Programmable Function keys Universal Night Answe...

Page 641: ...Night Mode Switching Customize the service code 718 to be used for day night mode switching 11 10 12 Service Code Setup for System Administrator Night Mode Switching for Other Group Customize the service code 618 to be used for Day Night mode switching for another Night service group 11 12 43 Service Code Setup for Service Access Universal Answer Customize the service code 0 to be used to manually...

Page 642: ...rt end times for each Time Pattern 1 10 12 03 01 Weekly Night Service Switching Assign one of the 10 Time Patterns programmed in 12 02 01 to each day of the week 12 04 01 Holiday Night Service Switching Assign one of the 10 Time Patterns to holidays 12 05 01 Night Mode Group Assignment for Extensions Assign a Day Night Mode Group 01 32 for each extension 12 06 01 Night Mode Group Assignment for Tr...

Page 643: ...nk Setup Assign the incoming trunk type for each trunk There is one item for each Night Service Mode 1 8 22 04 01 Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment To have trunks ring extensions during the different Night Service modes for ANA assign extensions to Ring Groups For each extension in the Ring Groups 1 100 indicate in Program 22 06 01 if trunk should ring 1 or not ring 0 22 05 01 Incoming Trun...

Page 644: ...erminal press the Speaker key OR At the single line telephone lift the handset 2 Dial 718 To change a different group s mode dial 618 the group number 01 32 3 Dial Night Service Code 1 Day 1 Mode 2 Night 1 Mode 3 Midnight 1 Mode 4 Rest 1 Mode 5 Day 2 Mode 6 Night 2 Mode 7 Midnight 2 Mode 8 Rest 2 Mode 4 Press Speaker key or hang up ...

Page 645: ... 1 Mode 2 Night 1 Mode 3 Midnight 1 Mode 4 Rest 1 Mode 5 Day 2 Mode 6 Night 2 Mode 7 Midnight 2 Mode 8 Rest 2 Mode To transfer a call to the Universal Answer External Page zones 1 Place the CO call on hold and dial the Transfer to Trunk Ring Group code assigned in PGM 11 15 09 You will hear a confirmation tone 2 Hang up The call rings over the External Paging enabling anyone to answer the call ...

Page 646: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 624 Night Service THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 647: ... manual signaling The users can dial a service code or press a Programmable Function Key to send Off Hook Signaling to the called telephone J Selectable Off Hook Signaling Mode The Off Hook Signal can be muted ringing no off hook ringing or a beep in the handset based on the caller s programming J Off Hook Ringing Use this option to enable or disable an extension s Off Hook Signaling for incoming ...

Page 648: ... send off hook signals to an extension busy on a Handsfree Speakerphone call The called extension s large LED flashes fast with no ringing The setting of Program 20 13 06 affects the BLF display for Hotline and Reverse Voice Over Refer to Hotline and Reverse Voice Over features for additional information You cannot send off hook signals to an extension that is already receiving a voice announcemen...

Page 649: ... Hook Signaling Assign a service code 809 by default to be used for Off Hook Signaling Override 11 16 04 Single Digit Service Code Setup Intercom Off Hook Signaling Assign a one digit service code to be used for Off Hook Signaling 15 02 12 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Off Hook Ringing For each extension set Off Hook Ringing type 0 muted 1 none 3 beep in speaker 4 beep in handset DID DNIS a...

Page 650: ...n an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 the extension s ability to automatically send Off Hook Signals while busy on a handset call 20 13 34 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Block Manual Off Hook Signaling Turn off 0 or on 1 an extension s ability to block off hook signals manually sent from a co worker 20 18 06 Service Tone Timer Call Waiting Tone Timer Use this time...

Page 651: ... Group Station one button access to stored speed dialing numbers J Trunk Calling one button access to trunks or trunk groups J Service Codes one button access to specific Service Codes An extension user can chain dial with One Touch Keys For example a user can store the number for a company s Automated Attendant in key 1 and employee extension numbers in keys 2 5 The user presses key 1 to call the...

Page 652: ...s a DSS One Touch key 01 30 03 01 DSS Console Key Assignment Customize DSS Console keys to function as DSS keys Service Code keys Programmable Function Keys and One Touch Calling keys When programming a feature within a One Touch Key refer to the feature s description for additional programming options Operation Programmable Function Keys To define a Programmable Function Key as a One Touch Key 1 ...

Page 653: ... To store a Flash press Redial c Press Hold d Press Speaker For Speed Dial System Group a Dial 2 to store a Speed Dial System dialing number OR Dial 4 to store a Speed Dial Group dialing number b Dial Speed Dial number storage code e g 001 c Press Hold d Press Speaker For Central Office Calls Placing Trunk Calling a a Dial the general trunk access code 9 OR Dial the specific Trunk Service Code 9 p...

Page 654: ... II 2 632 One Touch Calling c Press Speaker Checking One Touch Keys To check the function of a One Touch key 1 Press the Help key 2 Press the One Touch key The stored function displays Repeat this step to check additional keys 3 Press Exit ...

Page 655: ...tside calls or locate employees using the Page feature A maximum of eight operators are available Conditions Attendant extensions can have up to 32 incoming calls queued before additional callers hear busy tone The operator extension cannot be a CAR Key or virtual extension Default Setting Extension 101 is an operator System Availability Terminals All Stations Required Component s None ...

Page 656: ...erator telephone 0 Step 1 Circular 20 17 01 Operator s Extension Operator s Extension Number Designate an extension an operator When an extension user dials 0 or 9 defined by Program 11 01 Type 5 calls go to the operator selected in this program If you do not assign an extension in Program 90 11 01 system alarms appear on the extension assigned in this option Operation Refer to the individual feat...

Page 657: ...one Conditions Each OPX 2 U ETU provides two circuits The maximum loop resistance between an OPX 2 U ETU and an Off Premise Extension Single Line Telephone is 1600 ohms including Single Line Telephone set resistance The OPX 2 U ETU has a built in ringer RSG This ETU supports Synchronous Ringing and detects Dial Pulse DTMF tones The OPX 2 U ETU does not support an interface to a Voice Mail unit Def...

Page 658: ...Premise Extension Related Features Single Line Telephones Analog 500 2500 Sets Programming Refer to Single Line Telephones Analog 500 2500 Sets on page 2 745 for related programming Operation Normal call handling procedures for single line telephones apply ...

Page 659: ...ple you can Page your company s warehouse and outside loading dock at the same time Combined Paging is available for zones 1 8 and All Call Refer to Paging Internal on page 2 643 for more on setting up Combined Paging In addition you can program a Function Key as a Combined Paging key Using the External Page Function Key when an All Call External Page Function Key is programmed it will include bot...

Page 660: ...IE 8 U20 ETU installed ESIB E 16 the PGD 2 U10 ADP will have both channels available for Paging MOH External Ringers and Door Box according to strapping on ports 1 8 The corresponding port on the ESIE 8 U20 ETU will not support a station or other hardware it is used by the PGD 2 U10 ADP for channel 2 When a ESIB 8 U20 ETU is installed without an ESIE 8 U20 ETU installed a PGD 2 U10 ADP installed o...

Page 661: ...fer to Program 10 21 01 for the CPUII relay assignments 11 12 50 Service Code Setup For Service Access Specify the service code to be used for toggling the relay open and closed default 780 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Assign function keys for External Paging zones 19 zone and External All Call Page 20 If required define a function key for a multiline terminal to use the general purpose rel...

Page 662: ...rnal Paging Speaker 1 9 Options Splash Tone Before Page Item 1 Splash Tone After Page Item 2 31 06 04 External Speaker Control CODEC Transmit Gain Setup 31 06 05 External Speaker Control CODEC Receive Gain Setup Select the CODEC gain types 1 32 for each External Page Speaker External Paging Speaker Zone 1 9 31 07 01 Combined Paging Assignments Assign an External Paging Group 0 8 to an Internal Pag...

Page 663: ... the Combined Paging as an External Page If the Internal Page Zone is busy or if there are no extensions in a page group the page may be announced as an External Page only 3 Make Announcement 4 Dial 703 and the External Paging Zone code 1 8 or 0 for All Call OR Dial 1 and the Combined Paging Group code 1 8 or 0 for Internal External All Call Display indicates the Combined Paging as an External Pag...

Page 664: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 642 Paging External THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 665: ...assignments For example you can associate External Paging Zone 1 with Internal Paging Zone 4 You can program a Function Key as a Combined Paging key When an All Call External Page Function Key is programmed it will include both the external zones and the assigned internal zone s If the internal page zone is busy or there are no extensions in a page group the announcement will be made on the extern...

Page 666: ...e and Internal All Call Paging code 22 Internal Page Zones 0 1 9 00 01 64 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class Of Service 1 15 to an extension 20 13 29 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Paging Display In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 an extension s ability to display incoming internal paging information on their display 31 01 01 System Option...

Page 667: ...uncements 31 03 01 Internal Paging Group Settings Internal Paging Group Name Program names for the Internal Paging Zones 31 03 02 Internal Paging Group Settings Internal Paging Tone For each Internal Paging Zone have normal 0 muted 1 or no 2 Internal Paging alert tones If enabled 0 or 1 extensions hear two beeps before Paging announcements If disabled the extensions hear the announcement without t...

Page 668: ...nal Page Zone is busy or if there are no extensions in a page group the page will be announced as an External Page only 3 Make announcement 4 Press Speaker to hang up Single Line Telephone 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 701 and the Paging Zone number 0 9 or 00 64 Dialing 0 or 00 calls All Call Internal Paging Dial 1 and the Combined Paging Group code 1 8 or 0 for Internal External All Call 3 Make annou...

Page 669: ...rvice option parks a call it recalls after the Extended Park Orbit Recall time When an extension with the Normal Park Orbit Recall Class of Service option parks a call it recalls after the normal Park Orbit Recall time however the call remains in the park orbit until it is answered Programmable Function Key and Service Code Available for Personal Park The Personal Park feature is enhanced with the...

Page 670: ...e put in Personal Park Function keys simplify Park operation Default Setting Enabled System Availability Terminals Al Terminals Required Component s None Status Using 3 Digit Service Code Using 1 Digit Service Code Using Personal Park Key Speaking Not Available Not Available Available ICM Dial Tone or Busy Tone Available Not Available Available Calling Another Extension Not Available Available wit...

Page 671: ...tomize the one digit service code to be used when placing a call in Personal Park default No setting 15 02 08 Automatic Handsfree Use this option to set whether pressing a One Touch key will pre select the key or go off hook and access the key 0 Pre select 1 One Touch Automatic Handsfree 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Assign a keys as a Park Orbit key code 04 plus Park orbit number 01 64 or a...

Page 672: ...et the Extended Park Hold Time 0 64800 seconds A call left parked longer than this interval will recall the extension that initially parked it 24 03 01 Park Group Assign an extension to a Park Group 01 64 An extension can only pick up a call Parked by a member of its own Park Group Operation To Park a call in a system orbit You can Park Intercom or trunk calls 1 Press the Park key PGM 15 07 or SC ...

Page 673: ... or SC 752 04 orbit OR 1 At the multiline terminal or 2 button telephone press the Speaker key OR At single line telephone lift the handset 2 Dial 6 and the Park orbit 01 64 To park a call at your extension 1 Do not hang up 2 Press the Personal Park key PGM 15 07 or SC 752 07 OR Press Hold and dial 757 OR Press Hold press the Personal Park key PGM 15 07 or SC 752 07 At a 500 2500 SLT hookflash ins...

Page 674: ... or SC 752 07 OR Press the Speaker key and dial 757 At a single line telephone skip pressing the Speaker key The Personal Park single digit service code PGM 11 16 11 cannot be used in this operation If it recalls the extension pressing the Personal Park key or flashing Speaker key will answer the call The Personal Park single digit service code PGM 11 16 11 cannot be used in this operation To answ...

Page 675: ...Toll Restriction for the PBX trunk or restriction can be handled solely by the connected PBX If the telephone system provides the restriction it restricts the digits dialed after the PBX access code J PBX Call Restriction When the telephone system does the Toll Restriction it can further restrict users from dialing PBX extensions In this case the only valid numbers are those dialed after the PBX t...

Page 676: ...y Flash may allow access to certain PBX features like Transfer Make sure you program Flash for compatibility with the connected PBX The system does not provide automatic Pulse to Tone Conversion after outdialing the PBX trunk access code You can program incoming DISA trunks to be outgoing PBX trunks All PBX Compatibility restrictions and programming apply PBX trunks can follow normal system Toll R...

Page 677: ...s for trunks The trunk name displays at display multiline terminals for incoming and outgoing calls Up to 12 characters are allowed 14 01 08 Basic Trunk Data Setup Toll Restriction For each PBX trunk port enable 0 or disable 1 Toll Restriction 14 02 01 Analog Trunk Data Setup Signaling Type DP DTMF 14 02 02 Analog Trunk Data Setup Ring Detect Type 14 01 02 Basic Trunk Data Setup Transmit CODEC Gai...

Page 678: ...codes A code can be one or two digits long Valid entries are 0 9 and Use Line Key 1 as a don t care digit If using Account Codes do not use the within the PBX Access Code Operation To place a call over a PBX trunk 1 At multiline terminal press the Speaker key and dial 704 OR At single line telephone lift the handset and dial 704 2 Dial PBX trunk group number 1 9 or 001 100 3 Dial PBX access code a...

Page 679: ... the Speaker key OR At single line telephone lift the handset 2 Dial 9 3 Dial PBX trunk number e g 005 for line 5 4 Dial PBX access code and number OR 1 Press PBX trunk key PGM 15 07 or SC 752 01 1 to 200 2 Dial PBX access code and number In all cases above Toll Restriction may prevent your call ...

Page 680: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 658 PBX Compatibility THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 681: ...ation in IPK It allows the technician system administrator to download a database from the KTS make changes and then upload New to IPK II is WebPro This application is a web server running on the CPU card of the KTS No special installation program is required A user programs the KTS using their standard web browser An overview of the three programming applications is given below Figure 2 7 PC Prog...

Page 682: ...Connection Dialog Box J Direct connections are established using the RS232 serial port COM Port 1 on the side of the KTS J Modem remote connections are established via the internal CPU modem You need to dial in to an extension on the KTS and redirect that extension to the internal modem J IP LAN connections are established via the Ethernet connector on the CPU card Figure 2 8 PCPro Connection Dial...

Page 683: ...ng the PCPro application are Figure 2 9 WebPro Login Screen Table 2 14 Hardware Software Requirements for Running PCPro Item Requirement CPU Pentium III 598MHz minimum Pentium 4 2 5GHz recommended Memory 128 MB of RAM 256 MB recommended Disk Space 25MB minimum Operating System OS MS Windows 2000 or higher Windows XP recommended Browser MS Internet Explorer 6 0 Network IP and or RS232 connection to...

Page 684: ... 15 10 16 01 10 16 02 10 16 03 10 16 04 20 01 03 47 01 01 80 01 80 02 01 80 02 02 80 02 03 80 02 04 80 03 80 04 84 03 01 84 03 02 84 03 06 84 03 07 84 03 08 84 05 01 84 05 02 84 06 01 84 06 02 84 06 03 84 06 04 84 06 05 84 06 06 84 06 07 84 06 08 84 06 09 84 06 10 84 06 11 84 09 84 10 Default Setting None TCP Port If using IP connections PCPro needs TCP port 8000 to be open between the KTS and the...

Page 685: ...rk Setup Default Gateway Assign the CPU s Gateway address if PC Programming is required via LAN This program item must be set if WebPro access is required 10 21 02 IPK II Hardware Setup Baud rate for COM Port Assign the Baud rate for COM Port 1 Side of KSU COM 1 Default 2 19200 If a direct or remote modem connection is required via PC Programming then this PRG must be set 11 15 14 Service Code Set...

Page 686: ...90 02 can access the PRG If a PRG is not accessible then it will not appear in PCPro WebPro Operation Refer to the PC Programming manual for details of operation PCPro and WebPro Comparison The table below gives a quick feature comparison of PCPro and WebPro For further details refer to the PC Programming Manual Table 2 16 PCPro and WebPro Comparison Chart Feature Feature Application Comments PCPr...

Page 687: ...o Smart Controls Y WebPro has more simplified controls than PCPro Validation Y Y Multi Assignments Extension Numbers Y PCPro provides special screens that allow multiple values to be set easily This applies mainly to table data These screens shorten the programming time Line Keys CAP Y Line Keys General Y Account Codes Y Defaults View Y Copy System Data Level Y Y Copy items within an individual PR...

Page 688: ...generate various reports based on values in the database Verify Y Maintenance Y CAP Keys Y Numbering Plan Y Class of Service Y Modification History Y Simulators LCR ACR Y Import Export Speed Dials Y PCPro allows import export of speed dials csv file It can also import converted IPK databases IPK Converted File Y Program Help Help Pages Y Y WebPro has more simplified help than PCPro Context Sensiti...

Page 689: ...also tracks uploads downloads System Initialize Y Y This is the ability to initialize the KTS System Time Setting Y Y This is the ability to set the time on the KTS Software Updates Firmware Upload Y The KTS CPU firmware can be upgraded via PCPro Licensing Feature Activation PCPro Registration Y PCPro requires product registration KTS Feature Activation Y Y Licensed KTS features can activated via ...

Page 690: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 668 PC Programming THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 691: ...e dial Pulse or dual Tone Multifrequency Only single line telephones cross connected at the MDF can be used for this feature Single line telephones and outside lines connected during power failure are fixed one to one Single line telephones must be equipped with a ground start button for use with Ground Start Trunks System features cannot be activated from single line telephone when Power Failure ...

Page 692: ...670 Power Failure Transfer Required Component s SLI 4 8 U ETU Related Features None Programming 14 02 09 Busy Tone Detection 0 Disable default 1 Enable 14 02 14 Analog Trunk Data Setup Loop Start Ground Start 0 Loop Start default Operation None ...

Page 693: ...mming section of this feature J Incoming Prime Line Preference When the Prime Line rings the extension lifting the handset answers the call Incoming Prime Line Preference could benefit the Service Department dispatcher who must quickly answer customer s service calls and then dispatch repair technicians The dispatcher would have the assurance than whenever a customer calls in the dispatcher just l...

Page 694: ...utgoing Prime Line selection Also refer to 14 06 and 21 02 14 06 01 Trunk Group Routing Set up outbound route for trunk group that contains the Prime Line Also refer to 14 05 and 21 02 Trunk Group Routing 1 100 14 07 01 Trunk Access Map Setup For outgoing Prime Line selection assign each Prime Line trunk to a different Access Map and deny outbound access to all trunks except the Prime Line trunk T...

Page 695: ...g Prime Line access Trunk Groups 1 100 22 01 01 System Options for Incoming Calls Incoming Call Priority Set incoming Prime Line preference Enter 1 to answer ringing Prime Line enter 0 to answer ringing Intercom call 22 04 01 Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment Assign extension s to a ring group that consists of a Prime Line Ring Groups 1 100 22 05 01 Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment Assi...

Page 696: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 674 Prime Line Selection THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 697: ...ing and outgoing calls Private Lines do not follow Call Forwarding if not Direct Inward Line DIL Other programmed options for outgoing calls also affect a Prime Line Calls to extensions with DND active do not follow Call Forwarding programming Direct Inward Line DIL calls will ring an idle Department Group member then follow 22 08 programming then 22 05 programming An extension user can have Line ...

Page 698: ...Prime Line Selection Programmable Function Keys Single Line Telephones Analog 500 2500 Sets Toll Restriction Transfer Voice Mail Programming 14 07 01 Trunk Access Map Setup Assign Private Line to the Private Line Access Map refer to Program 15 06 in this section Use option 5 for Incoming option 7 for Both Ways and option 4 for Outgoing In all other Access Maps assign option 3 to the Private Line T...

Page 699: ...oming Call Trunk Setup Set the Trunk Service Type to 4 if routing unanswered Private Lines to voice mail or 0 if not routing to voice mail Ring Groups 1 100 22 04 01 Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment Assign extension to Private Line s ring group Set the ringing in Program 22 06 use option 1 for Incoming or Both Ways Private Lines Use option 0 for Outgoing Private Lines Do not assign any oth...

Page 700: ...t To place a call from your Multiline Terminal on you Private Line 1 Press the Private Line key then press the Speaker key or lift the handset 2 Dial the number To answer a call from you Multiline Terminal on your Private Line 1 Press Private Line key or press the Speaker key or lift handset To place a call on your Private line from a single line telephone 1 Pick up handset Private Line dial tone ...

Page 701: ...one to which the programming is being copied This may cause confusion when trying to define a key which is already defined but which does not exist on the telephone will display as DUPLICATE DATA It is recommend to either clear these non existent keys or to only copy from an extension which has the same or fewer number of keys than the extension to which the programming is being copied When using ...

Page 702: ...minals All Multiline Terminals Required Component s D16 LD R ADM Related Features Speed Dial System Group Station One Touch Calling Direct Station Selection 12 Call Forward No Answer CFNA 13 Call Forward Busy No Answer CFBNA 14 Call Forward Both Ringing CFBOTH 15 Call Forward Follow me FLWME Refer to the Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual for a complete list of Function Numbers Function Numbe...

Page 703: ...ogrammable Function Key Programming Appearance Level In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 an extension s ability to program their own function keys using service code 752 When programming a feature as a Programmable Function Key refer to PGM 15 07 01 in the Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual Operation To change a 2 digit programmable key 1 Press the Speaker key 2 Dial 751 ...

Page 704: ...ual To undefine a key enter 000 When a key is programmed using service code 752 that key cannot be programmed with a function using the 751 code until the key is undefined 000 For example with a Park Key programmed by dialing 752 04 must be undefined by dialing 000 before it can be programmed as a Voice Over key by dialing 751 48 To check the function of a programmable key 1 Press Help 2 Press the...

Page 705: ...ffective after the data is backed up from temporary memory to permanent memory Conditions Multiple stations and or Web Pro Programming can program the system at the same time PC Programming and Programming from a Multiline Terminal cannot be performed at the same time Programming from a Multiline Terminal can require a password to enter programming Default Setting Enabled System Availability Termi...

Page 706: ...II 2 684 Programming from a Multiline Terminal Related Features PC Programming Programming 90 02 Maintenance Program Setting the Programming Password Operation Refer to the Electra Elite IPK II Programming Manual for additional information ...

Page 707: ... The user can for example J Place a call to an OCC over a DP trunk J Depending on programming Manually implement Pulse to Tone Conversion OR Wait 10 seconds J Dial the OCC security code and desired number The system dials the digits after the conversion as DTMF Conditions Pulse to Tone Conversion is only valid for Dial Pulse trunks Program 14 02 01 options 0 or 1 Default Setting Enabled System Ava...

Page 708: ...ming 14 02 07 Analog Trunk Data Setup DP to DTMF Conversion Options For each trunk set the type of DP to DTMF Conversion required automatic 0 automatic and manual 1 or manual 2 Operation To convert your telephone s dialing to tone after placing your call on a pulse line 1 Place a call over pulse line 2 Dial to switch the DP trunk to DTMF dialing ...

Page 709: ...en Listening to the ring back tone RBT Listening to the call waiting tone CWT In Hands free Answerback Mode In Voice Over Mode When Quick Transfer to Voice Mail is accessed the Voice Over feature is canceled While on an intercom ICM call dial the Quick Transfer Access Code default 8 to automatically transfer to that station Voice Mail box The Quick Transfer to Voice Mail is not allowed when caller...

Page 710: ...o be assigned as the voice mail group An entry of 0 means there is no voice mail installed Department Groups 0 1 64 For complete voice mail system programming refer to programming section of the applicable voice mail Operation To Quick Transfer a call while talking with an outside or internal party 1 Press the Transfer key and wait for an internal dial tone 2 Enter a station number and wait for a ...

Page 711: ...vision 1 Quick Transfer to Voice Mail 2 689 To leave a message using Quick Transfer to voice mail during an intercom call 1 Make the intercom call 2 Dial the Quick Transfer Access Code default 8 3 Leave a voice mail message 4 Hang up ...

Page 712: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 690 Quick Transfer to Voice Mail THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 713: ...ed Pressing the key will redial the number displayed Users can also press the Redial Key and dial a System Speed Dial bin number to access System Speed Dial Conditions Redial List requires the use of a display telephone Default Setting Enabled System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals Required Component s None ...

Page 714: ...To scroll through the last 10 outside numbers dialed 1 Press the Redial key Each time the Redial key is pressed it displays the next most recently dialed number 2 When the desired number is displayed press the key To access a System Speed Dial bin 1 Press the Redial key REDIAL SYS is displayed 2 Dial the System Speed Dial bin number The number stored in that bin is displayed for your preview 3 Pre...

Page 715: ...turns 12 00AM the phone system will reset and switch to the new firmware The Package file needed will be provided by NEC at the time the new version of main system software is released A Compact Flash CF is required to be connected to the CN5 connector for Remote System Upgrade During the Firmware Upgrade the Package file is copied to the CF and extracted The system will then reset and boot off th...

Page 716: ...ed Features PC Programming Programming Refer to the PC Programming on page 2 659 feature Operation PCPro 1 Obtain the firmware package file from NEC 2 Open and login to PCPro 3 Connect to the switch 4 Under the Communications menu choose the Firmware Update option 5 In the firmware update window browse to the location of the Firmware Package file For example the file name might be MainSWv0 36 pkg ...

Page 717: ...xxx xxx xxx 3 Login to WebPro with a username and password defined in PRG 90 02 4 In the Administration section of the Home page select the Firmware Upgrade Icon 5 On the Firmware Update page browse to the location of the firmware upgrade package file For example the file name might be MainSWv0 36 pkg 6 Select the schedule type N Immediately after upload N At the time Q If you choose At the time s...

Page 718: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 696 Remote System Upgrade THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 719: ... called party answers the number of retries is based on system programming Conditions Lifting the handset during a callout cycle will cancel Repeat Redial Other programmed options for outgoing calls can affect how a Repeat Redial call is placed Refer to Central Office Calls Placing options as needed For systems with Automatic Route Selection ARS ARS selects the trunk for the Repeat Redial call Sin...

Page 720: ... 01 Repeat Dial Setup Repeat Redial Count Set how many times Repeat Redial will automatically repeat if the call does not go through 21 08 02 Repeat Dial Setup Repeat Redial Interval Time Set the interval between Repeat Redial attempts 0 64800 seconds 21 08 03 Repeat Dial Setup Repeat Dial Calling Timer Set how long the system waits 0 64800 seconds for the called party to answer after a Repeat Red...

Page 721: ...PGM 15 07 or SC 751 29 Your Repeat Redial key flashes while you wait for the system to redial 3 Press Speaker to hang up The system periodically redials the call 4 Lift the handset when called party answers When using trunks with answer supervision the Repeat Redial feature will automatically cancel To cancel Repeat Redial 1 Press the Feature key 2 Press the Redial key OR 1 Press Repeat Redial key...

Page 722: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 700 Repeat Redial THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 723: ...Multiline Terminals are LK 01 LK 08 corresponds to CO 01 CO 08 DSS Console to Extension assignments for Attendant Add On Consoles are not assigned Default Attendant Add On Console key assignments are DSS Keys 001 060 Stations 101 160 First Initialization of the system returns all programming values to default Without a PC ATA Compact Flash Card installed press and hold the SW1 Load Switch and togg...

Page 724: ... IPK II 2 702 Resident System Program Related Features None Programming 14 02 09 Busy Tone Detection 0 Disable Default 1 Enable 14 02 14 Analog Trunk Data Setup Loop Start Ground Start 0 Loop Start Default 1 Ground Start Operation None ...

Page 725: ...dle the Reverse Voice Over key functions the same as a Hotline or One Touch key A multiline terminal s Reverse Voice Over key also shows at a glance the status of the associated extension When the destination extension is idle the Reverse Voice Over provides one button calling to the associated extension like a Hotline key An extension user cannot however use the Reverse Voice Over key to Transfer...

Page 726: ...er to a busy destination extension the system sets up a Voice Over The Voice Over continues until the Reverse Voice Over key is pressed again Default Setting Disabled None System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals Required Component s None Related Features Do Not Disturb Handsfree Answerback Forced Intercom Ringing Hotline One Touch Calling Programmable Function Keys Single Line Teleph...

Page 727: ...ce COS to each extension 1 15 Operation When on a call To place a Reverse Voice Over call 1 Press your Reverse Voice Over key PGM 15 07 or SC 751 47 destination extension Your Reverse Voice Over key lights steadily green and you can talk with the programmed Reverse Voice Over destination To receive a Reverse Voice Over Call while busy 1 1 Press the Voice Over key PGM 15 07 or SC 751 48 The voice o...

Page 728: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 706 Reverse Voice Over THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 729: ... group The system allows N Ring Groups 1 100 N In Skin Voice Mail 102 N Centralized Voice Mail 103 If an extension has a line key for the trunk Ring Group calls ring the line key If the extension does not have a line key the trunk rings the line appearance key If an extension has a key for a trunk that is not in its ring group the trunk follows Access Map programming Conditions DIL trunks disregar...

Page 730: ...Appearance CAP Keys code 08 CAP Key orbit 0001 9999 or 0000 for auto assign Trunks 1 200 22 02 01 Incoming Call Trunk Setup Assign the incoming trunk type 0 for each trunk There is one item for each Night Service Mode This option must be set to 0 for Ring Groups to work Night Service Time Mode 1 8 22 04 01 Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment Assign extensions to ring groups Ring Groups 1 100 ...

Page 731: ...Voice Mail For each table make a separate entry for each Night Service mode Ring Groups 1 100 102 In Skin External Voice Mail 103 Centralized Voice Mail 25 03 01 VRS DISA Transfer Ring Group With Incorrect Dialing Set the transfer destination for each DISA and Automated Attendant OPA trunk The destination can be a Ring Group or Voice Mail Make a separate entry for each Night Service mode Ring Grou...

Page 732: ...runk 2 X Trunk 3 X X Trunk assigned to indicated Ring Group 1 Make the same 22 04 entry for all Night Service modes Program 22 05 Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment Ring Group 1 2 3 Ext 301 1 01 01 Ext 302 01 1 01 Ext 303 01 01 1 1 Extension rings 0 Extension does not ring 1 To allow extension user to answer flashing line be sure to give extension incoming access to the trunk in Programs 14 07 a...

Page 733: ...st proceed the bin number Ringdown Extension can use Speed Dial System Group Station numbers and follow their trunk routing as the destination number Ringdown Extension follows Call Forwarding For example the ringdown destination can forward their calls When the Ringdown Extension user lifts the handset ringdown automatically calls the extension to which calls are forwarded If the Ringdown Extensi...

Page 734: ...ations Required Component s None Related Features Call Arrival Keys CAR Callback Call Forwarding Call Waiting Camp On Do Not Disturb Handsfree Answerback Forced Intercom Ringing Off Hook Signaling Speed Dial System Group Station Virtual Extensions Programming 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class Of Service 1 15 to an extension ...

Page 735: ...number up to 24 digits 512 Hotline assignments Remember to include the trunk access code usually 9 in front of the number when dialing outside numbers When programming Speed Dial System numbers as the destination the entry should be 753 bin number the service code for Speed Dialing and the Speed Dial bin number Operation To place a call if your extension has ringdown programmed 1 Lift the handset ...

Page 736: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 714 Ringdown Extension Internal External THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 737: ...off hook and dials a service code and the extension number of the monitored telephone The activity of the area where the monitored telephone is placed can then be heard at the monitoring telephone This service is available until the handset of the monitored telephone is placed on hook Conditions Room Monitor is for listening only It does not allow for conversation between the monitoring and monito...

Page 738: ...keys code 39 Room Monitor for single line telephones can be used with the Hotel Motel feature For Multiline Terminal Room Monitor requires uniquely programmed function keys Default Setting Disabled System Availability Terminals Multiline Terminals and Single Line Telephones Required Component s None Related Features Hotel Motel Programmable Function Keys ...

Page 739: ... Program 20 13 11 enter 0 In Program 20 06 01 assign Class of Service to extensions In Program 15 07 01 assign a Room Monitor key code 39 to both the monitoring and monitored extension Stop In Program 20 13 11 enter 1 No Yes In Program 20 13 12 enter 0 No Should a multiline terminal user have the ability to be monitored by another extension Yes In Program 20 13 12 enter 1 ...

Page 740: ... telephone user be able to initiate and receive Room Monitor In Program 42 03 12 enter 0 In Program 20 06 01 assign Class of Service to extensions In 11 14 17 change the service code to the desired entry Stop In Program 42 03 12 enter 1 No Yes Should Room Monitor service code be changed from the default setting of 675 Yes No ...

Page 741: ...ty to be monitored 42 03 12 Class of Service Options Hotel SLT Room Monitor Enable 1 or disable 0 a single line telephone s ability to use Room Monitor Operation You must activate Room Monitor at the extension initiating the monitor and at the extension you want to monitor You can only listen to one extension at a time Multiline Terminals To activate Room Monitor from an idle Multiline Terminal in...

Page 742: ...esk placing the handset s transmitter towards the room You cannot place or answer other calls while Room Monitor is active To activate Room Monitor at the initiating extension 1 Lift the handset at the telephone which will be monitoring another telephone 2 Dial 675 3 Dial 2 4 Dial number of extension number which will be monitored You cannot place or answer other calls while Room Monitor is active...

Page 743: ...d saves in system memory a dialed number up to 24 digits The number can be any combination of digits 0 9 and The system remembers the digits regardless of whether the call was answered unanswered or busy The system normally uses the same trunk group as for the initial call However the extension user can preselect a specific trunk if desired Conditions For systems with Automatic Route Selection ARS...

Page 744: ...5 by default to be used for dialing a saved number 11 12 18 Service Code Setup for Service Access Clear Save Number Dialing List Define the service code for Clear Save Number Dialing List 785 by default if it is not acceptable 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Assign a function key as a Save key code 30 Operation To save the outside number you just dialed up to 24 digits Use this feature before ...

Page 745: ...Save Number Dialed automatically selects a trunk from the same group as your original call The stored number dials out Single Line Telephone 1 Go off hook 2 Dial 715 To view the number you have saved from a multiline terminal with a display 1 Press the Save Number Dialed key PGM 15 07 or SC 751 30 The stored number displays for ten seconds The stored number dials out if you Q Lift the handset Q Pr...

Page 746: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 724 Save Number Dialed Single Line Telephone 1 Lift the handset and dial 785 2 Hang up ...

Page 747: ... when the actual station is set for call forwarding SIE keys can appear on an individual station or multiple stations A station can have more than one SIE key assigned Up to 32 calls can be queued waiting on an SIE key When a Secondary Incoming Extension call is received and answered while the user is on an outside line call the first call can be automatically put on hold If a trunk call rings a S...

Page 748: ...Call Arrival Keys CAR Virtual Extensions Programming 11 04 01 Virtual Extension Numbering V Port 1 256 Virtual Ext No Extension Number 15 01 01 Basic Extension Setup Extension Name Ext Name Extension Name 15 02 07 Automatic Hold for CO lines 0 Hold 1 Disconnect 15 02 21 Multi Line Telephone Basic Data Setup Virtual Extension Access Mode V Ext Key Mode 0 DSS default 1 OTG Outgoing Not supported for...

Page 749: ...n1 Pattern 2 default Order 3 Patrn2 Pattern 3 default Order 4 Patrn3 Pattern 4 default 15 11 01 Virtual Extension Delay Ring Assignment KY01 Mode1 1 Yes 0 No 15 18 01 Virtual Extension Key Mode 0 Release 1 Land On 20 04 03 System Options for Virtual Extensions Delay Interval Delay 10 sec default 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Mode1 Class No 1 default 20 07 10 Class of Service Options Adm...

Page 750: ... Stg Group 0 64 0 by default Operation To answer a call ringing a SIE key 1 Press the flashing SIE key To program a SIE key on a phone 1 Press the Speaker key 2 Dial 752 3 Press the key you want to program 4 Dial 03 5 Dial the number of the extension you want to appear on the key 6 Press Hold once for Immediate Ring skip to step 8 for Delayed Ring 7 Dial the mode number in which the key will ring ...

Page 751: ... tone is heard until either user cancels the Secretary Call A secretary could use this feature for example to get a message through to the boss in an important meeting After being alerted the boss could call the secretary when it s most convenient An extension can have Secretary Call keys for any number of extensions limited only by the available number of programmable keys Conditions Secretary Ca...

Page 752: ...z your secretary or boss 1 Do not lift the handset 2 Press the buzzer key PGM 15 07 or SC 751 41 sec ext Your boss or secretary hears ringing Your buzzer key lights steadily Your boss s or secretary s buzzer key flashes fast The telephone continues to ring until the Secretary Call key is pressed To check to see who left you a Secretary Call 1 Do not lift the handset 2 Press the Help key 3 Press th...

Page 753: ...n 1 Secretary Call Buzzer 2 731 To cancel a Secretary Call you left at another extension 1 Press the lit Secretary Call key To cancel a Secretary Call left at your extension 1 Do not lift the handset 2 Press the flashing Secretary Call key ...

Page 754: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 732 Secretary Call Buzzer THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 755: ...y cover each other s clients When a representative leaves their desk an associate could press the Secretary Call Pickup key to intercept all their calls An extension can have Secretary Call Pickup keys for any number of extensions limited only by the available number of programmable keys Conditions Secretary Call Pickup is not available to single line telephone users A Call Arrival CAR Key virtual...

Page 756: ...y at the source and destination extensions Operation To activate Secretary Call Pickup 1 Press your Secretary Call Pickup key PGM 15 07 or SC 751 42 boss extension Your Secretary Call Pickup key lights and the Boss s telephone display shows BOSS FWD Calls intended for covered extension ring your telephone instead To cancel Secretary Call Pickup 1 Press your lit Secretary Call Pickup key PGM 15 07 ...

Page 757: ...For example an extension user could select the message ON VACATION UNTIL and then enter the date Callers see the original message followed by the appended date They would then be able to tell when the user was coming back from vacation The system allows all telephones to use the Selectable Display Messaging feature at the same time All telephones are able to use Selectable Display Messaging at one...

Page 758: ...t s None Related Features Do Not Disturb Programmable Function Keys Programming 11 11 14 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Text Message Setting Define the service code to be used when setting a text message 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Assign a function key for Text Message code 18 The Text Message key automatically selects the message used when programming the key ...

Page 759: ...isplay mode The time that displays in Selectable Display Messages follows this setting 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class Of Service 1 15 to an extension 20 13 19 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Selectable Display Messaging In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 an extension s ability to use Selectable Display Messaging 20 16 01 Selectable Disp...

Page 760: ... 01 02 To allow calls to ring through and have the message displayed on the calling extension s display cancel DND by pressing DND 0 To cancel a message 1 Press the Speaker key press the Text Message key PGM 15 07 or SC 751 18 2 Press Speaker to hang up Using the Text Message Service Code to select a message 1 Press the Speaker key dial the Text Message service code Program 11 11 14 2 Dial the Sel...

Page 761: ...is important in a crowded work area where several telephones are close together Because their telephone has a characteristic ring the user always can tell when it s their telephone ringing Conditions Only ring tones 1 High 2 Medium 3 Low are available Electra Elite and Dterm Series E terminals DTU DTP If the other tones are selected the terminal will ring with 2 Medium tone Default Setting Enabled...

Page 762: ...Use this option to set the tone pitch of the incoming trunk ring for the extension port you are programming 15 02 03 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Internal Ring Tone Use this option to set the tone pitch of the incoming extension call ring for the extension port you are programming Also refer to program 15 08 15 08 01 Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup Assign a ring tone pattern 0 4...

Page 763: ...ings an extension There are four ring tones available Operation To change your extension s incoming ring tones 1 Press the Speaker key 2 Dial 720 3 Dial 1 to set Intercom ring 2 to set trunk ring 4 Dial code for the desired ring pattern 1 8 5 Press Speaker to hang up To listen to the incoming ring choices 1 Press the idle Speaker key 2 Dial 711 3 Dial 1 to listen to Intercom ring 2 to listen to tr...

Page 764: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 742 Selectable Ring Tones THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 765: ...se the client of certain costs when Technical Service is done Rather than transferring the call back and forth the CSR can use Serial Call to Technical Service and announce I have Ted on the telephone I need to talk to him again Just hang up when you re done and I ll get him back Conditions The transferring extension can remain off hook to auto receive the callback or hang up and it will ring back...

Page 766: ...s a Serial Call key code 43 Operation To place a Serial Call to a co worker 1 Place or answer a call 2 Press Hold 3 Dial co worker s extension number Co worker must Lift the handset to respond to your announcement 4 Press the Serial Call key PGM 15 07 or SC 751 43 but do not hang up When your co worker hangs up the call the system makes an automatic live transfer back to your extension ...

Page 767: ... the system will use the settings in Program 82 09 SLIU CODEC Filter Data Setup These values should not be changed from their default settings unless directed by NEC S Technical Service department The side tone of the SLIU is adjusted using all 16 values however special software is required in order to compute these values The setting is not proportional to the gain level To change these values co...

Page 768: ...Pulse 500 type single line telephones cannot access any features that require the user to dial or Default Setting Single Line Telephones function as soon as they are installed and properly programmed System Availability Terminals DTR 1 1 DTH 1HM 1 DTH 1 1 DTP 1 2 DTP 1HM 2 DTR 1R 2 Required Component s SLI U ...

Page 769: ...gle line extensions allocate at least one circuit for analog extension DTMF reception entry 0 or 1 Use the following as a guide when allocating DTMF receivers H Speed Dialing H Account Codes H Alarm H Automatic Route Selection H Barge In H Call Forwarding H Call Forwarding with Follow Me H Call Forwarding DND Override H Call Waiting Camp On with Split H Callback H Central Office Calls Answering H ...

Page 770: ...phones only when using Continued Dialing 20 13 13 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Continued Dialing Set option to 0 to prevent dual DTMF tones when using Continued Dialing 20 15 01 Ring Cycle Setup Normal Incoming Call on Trunk Define the ringing cycle 1 13 for normal incoming trunk calls DIL ring group etc 20 15 03 Ring Cycle Setup Incoming Internal Calls Define the ringing cycle 1...

Page 771: ...Electra Elite IPK II Document Revision 1 Single Line Telephones Analog 500 2500 Sets 2 749 Operation Refer to the individual features listed in the Related Features chart above ...

Page 772: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 750 Single Line Telephones Analog 500 2500 Sets THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 773: ...nstalled in the Electra Elite IPK II system Conditions A maximum of eight SLT 1 U ADPs can be used in the Electra Elite IPK II system Dial Pulse and Dual Tone Multifrequency Single Line Telephones are supported The SLT 1 U ADP does not support voice mail Message Waiting LED is not supported An SLT connected to an SLT Adapter SLT 1 U ADP cannot perform a Trunk to Trunk Transfer or support a 1 termi...

Page 774: ...Extension Numbering 20 07 Class of Service Administrator Level 20 08 14 Class of Service Operation To originate internal calls 1 Lift the handset and wait for internal dial tone 2 Dial the applicable internal number 3 Talk when called party answers To originate outside calls 1 Lift the handset and wait for dial tone 2 Dial Trunk Access Code default 9 3 Dial the number of outside party 4 Talk when ...

Page 775: ...l in progress 1 Provide hookflash The call is placed on Exclusive Hold Receive internal dial tone 2 Dial the Trunk Access Code for the applicable trunk 3 Dial the applicable number 4 Hang up To initiate a conference with a call in progress 1 Provide hookflash and dial 1 2 Dial the applicable number and wait for the party to answer 3 Provide hookflash and repeat the second step to add parties to th...

Page 776: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 754 SLT Adapter THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 777: ... also customize the point at which the built in speakerphone switches from transmit to receive a boon for noisy environments The display telephones also have a contrast control for the LCD display Conditions If a feature is restricted by an extension s Class of Service though the Softkey menu will still display the option the user can not set the feature Using the Directory Dialing Softkeys the Re...

Page 778: ...ocument Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 756 Softkeys System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals Required Component s None Related Features Directory Dialing Volume Controls Programming None ...

Page 779: ...orce System Speed Dialing numbers to route over a specific Trunk Group User pre selection always overrides the system routing System Bins Limited to 1000 with Speaker Key or 2 Service Code Though there are 2000 Speed Dialing bins available in the system once programmed these bins can currently only be dialed using the Directory Dial feature Press Directory key SYS softkey use arrow keys to locate ...

Page 780: ...ch calling via a telephone s function keys Conditions Speed Dial bins can contain stored Account Codes To prevent them from being displayed use 20 07 04 ARS selects the trunk for the call unless the user preselects A user can implement Speed Dial only if their extension has outgoing access to trunks An extension can have a One Touch Key for Speed Dial operation If you enter a PBX trunk access code...

Page 781: ...on Dial Tone Detection One Touch Calling PBX Compatibility Programmable Function Keys Single Line Telephones Analog 500 2500 Sets Trunk Group Routing Programming 10 09 01 DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit Setup If dial tone detection is enabled be sure to allocate at least one circuit for dial tone detection Type 0 or 2 11 12 10 Service Code Setup for Service Access System Extension Speed Dialing Assign ...

Page 782: ...ssign the extension s Redial key for either Common 0 or Group 1 Speed Dialing 15 07 01 Programming Function Keys Assign a function key for System Speed Dialing 27 or Group Speed Dialing 28 You can program the key as either a general Speed Dialing key or you can choose to store a bin number with the function key This key would then always dial the associated bin number If storing a bin number along...

Page 783: ...iteria for dial tone detection and call progress tone detection for outgoing Speed Dialing calls 81 01 16 ATRU LS Initial Data Setup Pause Time If Speed Dialing numbers include a pause the system uses this timer to determine the length of the pause This timer is enabled disabled in 14 02 06 Operation To store an Speed Dialing number display telephones only 1 Press the Speaker key 2 Dial 753 for sy...

Page 784: ...s A C a c 2 3 Enter characters D F d f 3 4 Enter characters G I g i 4 5 Enter characters J L j l 5 6 Enter characters M O m o 6 7 Enter characters P S p s 7 8 Enter characters T V t v 8 9 Enter characters W Z w z 9 0 Enter characters 0 ô Õ ú ä ö ü α ε θ Enter characters B E σ S Accepts an entry only required if two letters on the same key are needed ex TOM Pressing again Space In system programmin...

Page 785: ...1 At the multiline terminal press the Speaker key 2 Press the key which has the stored number to be dialed The number seizes an outside line and dials out To dial a Group Speed Dialing number 1 Go off hook 2 Press the Redial key OR 3 Press the Group Speed Dialing key PGM 15 07 01 or SC 751 28 To preselect press a line key in step 1 instead of Speaker before pressing the Redial or Speed Dialing key...

Page 786: ...ion Speed Dial buffer 2 0 Station Speed Dial buffer 10 4 Dial the telephone number you want to store up to 24 digits Valid entries are 0 9 and To enter a pause press MIC To store a Flash press Recall 5 Press Hold 6 Enter the name associated with the Speed Dialing number display telephones only Key for Entering Names Use this keypad digit When you want to 1 Enter characters 1 _ Á À Â Ã Ç É Ê ì ó 2 ...

Page 787: ... number dials out Unless you preselect Trunk Group Routing selects the trunk for the call The system may optionally select a specific Trunk Group for the call If you have a DSS Console you may be able to press a DSS Console key to chain to a stored number Enter characters B E σ S Accepts an entry only required if two letters on the same key are needed ex TOM Pressing again Space Conf Clears the ch...

Page 788: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 766 Speed Dial System Group Station THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 789: ...sole also has an additional 100 programmable speed dials that are separate from the System or Station Speed dials Conditions The Add on Module ADM Directory PC application must be used to edit the directory database Refer to the documentation provided with the D16 LD R ADM unit A maximum of 100 Directories can be stored in the D16 LD R ADM Default Setting None System Availability Terminals DTR H 8...

Page 790: ...le Function Key Programming Use this option to set the service code default 752 to assign 3 digit function codes to the Function keys 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Assign function keys to the D16 LD R ADM 15 20 01 LCD Line Key Name Assignment Assign a name to each LCD Line Key of the DTH DTR 16LD 1 Telephone or D16 LD R ADM Up to eight characters can be assigned Operation To program a Key on...

Page 791: ...lace another Intercom call if the first extension called is unavailable Conditions If required use this option to change the Department Step Calling Single Digit Service Code default code 2 A function key for Department Step Calling can be assigned code 36 In PGM 20 08 12 will enable 1 or disable 0 an extension s ability to use Department Step Calling Default Setting Not Enabled System Availabilit...

Page 792: ...ension 20 09 07 Class of Service Options Incoming Call Service Call Queuing In an extension Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 Call Queuing to the extension This must be set to 0 for Station Hunting to work 20 13 06 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Automatic Off Hook Signaling In an extension Class of Service allows a busy extension to manually 0 or automatically 1 receive off ho...

Page 793: ... application J Customized Date Format The SMDR header can show the report date in one of three formats American European or Japanese Set the format for your preference J Transferred Call Tracking SMDR shows each extension s share of a transferred call If an outside call is transferred among four extensions SMDR shows how long each of the callers stayed on the call J Data Call Tracking Data Call Tr...

Page 794: ...ges like WATS lines from the SMDR report This makes call accounting easier since you review only those calls with variable costs J Usage Summaries SMDR can automatically print daily weekly and monthly call activity summaries Each summary includes the total number of regular trunk calls and ISDN trunk calls and the costs for each type The daily report prints every day at midnight The weekly report ...

Page 795: ...record is displayed If Program 35 02 18 1 Caller ID Name Output Method is set to line feed the SMDR will display as follows CLASS TIME DATE LINE DURATION STATION DIALLED No CLI ACCOUNT POT 10 52 12 09 002 00 00 10 2001 2142623801 08754 PIN 10 52 12 09 001 00 00 20 2017 2142623802 NECinfrontia Cor PIN 10 53 12 09 002 2142623801 NO ANSWER CLASS TIME DATE LINE DURATION STATION DIALLED No CLI ACCOUNT ...

Page 796: ...was on call after answering the Transfer STATION Extension number of call owner i e extension that first placed or answered call For Transferred calls there can be more than one owner depending on how many extensions shared the call DIALLED No CLI For outgoing calls the number dialed or for incoming calls the Caller ID information ACCOUNT Account Code number entered by extension user Class Definit...

Page 797: ...1 70 MM DD YYYY 71 Space 72 75 PAGE 76 Space 77 79 Report page number e g 001 CR LF Carriage return and line feed Header Line 2 1 5 CLASS 6 Space 7 10 TIME 11 14 Spaces 15 18 LINE 19 22 Spaces 23 30 DURATION 31 32 Spaces 33 39 STATION 40 44 Spaces 45 51 DIALLED 52 Space 53 59 No CLI 60 63 Spaces 64 70 ACCOUNT CR LF Carriage return and line feed LF Line feed SMDR Record 1 4 Call type e g POT for ou...

Page 798: ...gits maximum 63 Space 64 79 Account number or NO ANSWER Table 2 22 SMDR Report Format with Program 35 02 14 Set to 1 Character Position Field Definition Header Line 1 1 60 Spaces 61 70 MM DD YYYY 71 Space 72 75 PAGE 76 Space 77 79 Report page number e g 001 CR LF Carriage return and line feed Header Line 2 1 5 CLASS 6 Space 7 10 TIME 11 Spaces Table 2 21 SMDR Report Format with Program 35 02 14 Se...

Page 799: ...aces 64 70 ACCOUNT CR LF Carriage return and line feed LF Line feed SMDR Record 1 4 Call type e g POT for outgoing 5 Space 6 10 Time in 24 hour clock HH MM 11 Space 12 16 DATE 17 Space 18 21 LINE 22 Space 23 30 Call Duration HH MM SS 31 Space 32 41 Station number or name 42 Space 43 62 Number dialed 20 digits maximum Table 2 22 SMDR Report Format with Program 35 02 14 Set to 1 Continued Character ...

Page 800: ...ber or NO ANSWER Table 2 23 SMDR Summary Report OUTGOING CALL COST SUMMARY FOR DAY OF nn nn nn TOTAL NO OF OUTGOING PSTN CALLS 0 TOTAL NO OF OUTGOING ISDN CALLS 0 NO OF OUTGOING PSTN CALLS COSTED 0 COST 0 NO OF OUTGOING ISDN CALLS COSTED 0 COST 0 OUTGOING CALL COST SUMMARY FOR WEEK ENDING nn nn nn TOTAL NO OF OUTGOING PSTN CALLS 49 TOTAL NO OF OUTGOING ISDN CALLS 0 NO OF OUTGOING PSTN CALLS COSTED...

Page 801: ...ay option The setting in Program 35 02 18 works regardless of the entry in Program 35 02 15 or 35 02 17 When Program 35 02 18 is set to 1 the first and second lines are sometimes separated When the buffer is full the overflowed data may not be shown The special characters used in the Electra Elite IPK II system cannot be output to the SMDR they are converted to _ To use the PBX Call Reporting opti...

Page 802: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 780 Station Message Detail Recording Related Features PBX Compatibility Traffic Reports ...

Page 803: ...a null modem cable from the CPU to the PC to be used for SMDR Refer to the Data and SMDR section in the Electra Elite IPK II Hardware Manual for pin out details Ethernet In 10 20 01 define the TCP port when communicating to the SMDR external device 5 Connect a USB cable to the CPU and PC USB The PC recognizes the new hardware and asks to install the driver Install the CPU USB driver In 35 01 01 se...

Page 804: ...o In 35 01 01 set the SMDR output to 4 for CTA CTU In 35 01 02 define the extension number of the multiline terminal with the CTA Adapter Set the dip switches on the CTA Adapter to pins 1 and 2 On up 3 8 Off down Connect the line cord to the multiline terminal Without the line cord connected to the multiline terminal install the CTA Adapter onto the multiline terminal Wait one minute for the syste...

Page 805: ...lick on Manage The baud rate selected in the HyperTerminal does not matter with the USB connection Attach ferrite beads to the AC R power cable and USB cables Install on the ends closest to the adapter Check 10 03 04 for the multiline terminal Does it show the CTU installed Disconnect the telephone Undefine the multiline terminal s port in 10 03 01 Remove the CTU Adapter No Refer to the Electra El...

Page 806: ...01 enter 0 American European In 80 05 01 enter 1 Japanese In 80 05 01 enter 2 In 35 01 04 enter the number of digits you want to block If you enter 8 for example SMDR Xs out the last 8 digits dialed Do you want to block i e X out any of the digits on the SMDR Report In 35 01 04 enter 0 To only have long distance calls print for example enter 8 In 35 01 05 enter the minimum number of digits a user ...

Page 807: ...ls blocked by Toll Restriction In 35 02 01 enter 1 No Yes In 35 02 01 enter 0 If your system is behind a PBX do you want SMDR to include all calls to the PBX or just calls using the PBX trunk access code In 35 02 02 enter 1 All Calls In 35 02 02 enter 0 Access Code Calls Should the SMDR report display the trunk name or the date and trunk number In 35 02 03 enter 1 Date Trunk Number In 35 02 03 ent...

Page 808: ...nsion Name Set 15 01 03 to 1 for each extension which provides SMDR Should SMDR report include extension names or numbers Should SMDR report include information when all lines in a group are busy and a user tries to access the group In 35 02 10 enter 1 No Yes In 35 02 10 enter 0 Should the DID table name be displayed for incoming DID calls In 35 02 12 enter 1 No Yes In 35 02 12 enter 0 Should SMDR...

Page 809: ...5 02 16 enter 1 Received Number Dialed In 35 02 16 enter 0 In 35 02 15 enter 2 to display Caller ID name Trunk Name Should SMDR report include the account code or Caller ID name In 35 02 17 enter 1 Caller ID Name In 35 02 17 enter 0 Account Code Should the Caller ID name appear on the same line as the call record In 35 02 18 enter 0 No Yes In 35 02 18 enter 1 Selecting this option inserts a line f...

Page 810: ...nsion s calls should appear on SMDR report Enter 0 if extension s calls should not appear on SMDR report 15 02 19 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup CTA CTU Data Communication Mode Select 0 if the dip switch settings are set to PC connection or select 1 if printer SMDR connection is selected on the CTA CTU adapter 15 02 20 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Baud Rate for CTA Port Set the baud ...

Page 811: ...er how long an unanswered call must ring 1 65535 seconds before SMDR logs it as No Answer Enter 0 to allow all No Answer calls to print 35 01 08 SMDR Options SMDR Format Do not change This option is added to allow an increased account code field from 8 to 16 when used in the U K This allows 16 characters of the Caller ID name to be displayed For the U S this option is set to 0 and should remain at...

Page 812: ...ines Busy ALB Output Enter 1 to report information when all lines in a group are busy and an extension user tries to access the group Enter 0 if this information should not be included 35 02 12 SMDR Output Options DID Table Name Output Determine if the DID table name should be displayed for incoming DID calls DID Table Name Display 0 Not Displayed 1 Displayed 35 02 13 SMDR Output Options CLI Outpu...

Page 813: ...o 24 characters of the Caller ID Name will be displayed on the following line 1 If the line feed option is selected the Caller ID Name will be displayed on the next line as NEXT Caller ID Name The default entry for this option is 0 This setting will work regardless of the setting in Program 35 02 15 With this option set to 1 if your communications program such as HyperTerminal has the line wrap op...

Page 814: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 792 Station Message Detail Recording THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 815: ...e for their telephone extension or any extension within the system The name is displayed on the multiline terminal s LCD when an intercom or K CCIS call is placed Conditions Display telephones use extension names for Directory Dialing Single line telephone extensions cannot program names Default Setting Enabled System Availability Terminals All display Multiline Terminals Required Component None ...

Page 816: ... Assign a Class Of Service 1 15 to an extension 20 13 21 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Extension Name In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 an extension s ability to program their name Operation To program your extension name 1 Press the Speaker key 2 Dial 700 OR Press the Extension Name Change key PGM 15 07 or SC 751 55 3 Press the Hold key 4 Enter the name Ref...

Page 817: ...ou want to 1 Enter characters 1 _ Æ Á À Â Ã Ç É Ê ì ó 2 Enter characters A C a c 2 3 Enter characters D F d f 3 4 Enter characters G I g i 4 5 Enter characters J L j l 5 6 Enter characters M O m o 6 7 Enter characters P S p s 7 8 Enter characters T V t v 8 9 Enter characters W Z w z 9 0 Enter characters 0 ô Õ ú ä ö ü α ε θ Enter characters B E σ S Accepts an entry only required if two letters on t...

Page 818: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 796 Station Name Assignment User Programmable THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 819: ...tension Swap service code is dialed from an extension that does not have an extension swap password programmed busy tone will be heard If the Extension Swap service code is dialed from an extension who s class of service does not allow Extension Data Swap busy tone will be heard If the destination extension entered is not a valid extension busy tone will be heard The following user setting data is...

Page 820: ...Service Extension Data Swap 0 Off 1 On default 92 05 01 Extension Data Swap Password Tel Extension Number Password Blank by default The following programs are swapped when Station Relocation is used PRG 11 02 Extension Numbering PRG 12 05 Night Mode Group Assignment for Extensions PRG 13 03 Speed Dial Group Assignment for Extensions PRG 15 01 Extension Basic Data Setup PRG 15 02 Multi Line Telepho...

Page 821: ...erride Password Setup PRG 21 10 Dial Block Restriction Class per Extensions PRG 21 11 Hotline Assignment PRG 21 13 ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Extension PRG 21 15 Individual Trunk Group Routing for Extensions PRG 21 18 IP Trunk H 323 Calling Party Number Setup for Extension PRG 21 19 IP Trunk SIP Calling Party Number Setup for Extension PRG 21 20 SIP Trunk Call Discernment Setup for Extens...

Page 822: ...xchange two terminals 1 Pick up the handset or press the Speaker key 2 Dial the Extension Data Swap Service Code not assigned at default 11 15 12 3 Dial the Extension Data Swap Password not assigned at default 92 05 01 4 Dial the extension to be swapped with or relocated to 5 When successfully completed confirmation tone will be heard and the display will show completed 6 Press the Speaker key twi...

Page 823: ... Conditions When the multiline terminal is ringing at Secondary Extension SE Virtual Extension VE key Synchronous Ring will work Synchronous Ringing is not supported for Tie DID incoming calls Off Hook Ringing or CO PBX Ring Transfers Default Setting Enabled System Availability Terminals All Stations except single line telephones connected to AP R R or APR U Unit Required Component s None Related ...

Page 824: ...2 802 Synchronous Ringing Programming 14 02 17 Synchronous Ringing Enable Disable Per Trunk Enable or disable per trunk 0 Disable 1 Enable default 22 03 01 Trunk Ring Tone Setup Define the ring tone for each trunk 0 8 default 0 Operation None ...

Page 825: ...y use trunks 9 32 If you have 8COIU ETUs installed for trunks 1 8 and 17 24 the T1 PRI ETU will use trunks 25 48 The T1 PRI Interface cannot use trunks 9 16 even if available since they are not part of a consecutive block of 24 trunks Each T1 PRI ETU requires that 24 consecutive ports be available in the system even if not all the ports will be used otherwise the ETU will not function ANI DNIS Com...

Page 826: ...y the incoming ANI DNIS call waits for a receiver to become available The ANI DNIS Address data received from the Telco can be up to 10 digits long An extension s Class of Service Program 20 09 02 determines whether ANI information is displayed Refer to Dial Tone Detection on page 2 267 for the specifics on how the system detects dial tone The T1 tie line can be used for networking The T1 PRI Inte...

Page 827: ... the trunk name T1 trunks follow tie line toll restriction programming 34 01 05 and 34 08 Default Setting Disabled System Availability Terminals All Stations Required Component s DTI U40 ETU with firmware V5 00 or higher Locally provided CSU DSU Related Features Caller ID Central Office Calls Answering Central Office Calls Placing Code Restriction Dial Tone Detection Direct Inward Dialing DID ISDN...

Page 828: ...a CODEC Gain Type to each trunk This sets the amount of gain amplification for the selected trunk 14 01 07 Basic Trunk Data Setup Outgoing Calls For ANI DNIS the following additional setting is recommended Outgoing Calls 1 Allowed 14 02 01 Analog Trunk Data Setup Additional ANI DNIS Recommended Settings For ANI DNIS the following additional settings in Program 14 02 are recommended H Item 1 Signal...

Page 829: ...the Telco s connected T1 service For each T1 trunk that should support ANI DNIS service enter 7 ANI DNIS trunks must be immediate start or wink start T1 trunks with E M signaling For T1 loop ground start trunks defined as 0 Program 14 02 02 must be set to 1 in order for the trunks to ring and lamp correctly 22 13 01 DID Trunk Group to Translation Table Assignment Assign DID translation tables to t...

Page 830: ...ch the ANI digits defined in Program 22 11 01 For example if an ANI DNIS number received was 2035551234 3001 and Program 22 09 01 4 then the entry in 22 11 01 must be 1234 with the defined target extension If the call is to be routed using the ABB table 0 up to 24 digits can be matched Define the range of the ABB table to be used in Program 34 09 06 The data is then compared to the entries in Prog...

Page 831: ...Destination Busy or No Answer This option lets you determine how the system will handle an ANI DNIS call if destination is busy or does not answer 0 Play busy or ringback tone to caller 1 Route the caller to the ring group specified in Program 25 04 34 09 09 ANI DNIS Service Options Calling Number Address Length When Item 1 0 ANI DNIS receive format is address use this option to specify the addres...

Page 832: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 810 T1 Trunking with ANI DNIS Compatibility THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 833: ...n numbers up to eight digits can be registered on the Tandem Ringing key Extension numbers over 9 digits cannot be registered If Tandem Ringing is enabled and one of the extensions is busy no additional calls can be received or placed from either telephone Tandem Ringing can support up to 128 pairs of Tandem Ringing extensions The extension user which enables Tandem Ringing is the master while the...

Page 834: ...als and Single Line telephones Slave Telephone Single Line telephones and Wireless DECT handsets Required Component s ID using Wireless DECT handsets Refer to Wireless DECT on page 2 967 Related Features Call Forwarding Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb Override Direct Station Selection Do Not Disturb Hold Intercom Message Waiting Ring Groups Tie Lines ...

Page 835: ... Tandem Ringing key PGM 15 07 or SC 751 80 3 Dial 1 to set the feature 4 Enter the extension number to be considered the slave telephone the telephone that will ring when the master extension rings A confirmation tone will be heard if the Speaker key was used 5 Press Speaker to hang up if the key is lit While the feature is active if either the master or slave telephone is on a call no calls can b...

Page 836: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 814 Tandem Ringing THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 837: ...hannels used does not exceed the block s limit of 32 Tandem Trunking could help an office manager for example put two outside sales people in touch The office manager could J Answer a call from one salesperson J Place a call to the second salesperson J Set up the Trunk to Trunk Conference J Drop out of the call The office manager could terminate the conference at any time There are four methods fo...

Page 838: ... to Trunk Conversation J Program 20 28 01 Conversation Continue Code J Program 20 28 02 No Setting No Conversation Disconnect Code entered J Program 20 28 03 180 Conversation Extend Time J Program 24 02 07 600 Only used with Tandem Trunking Warning Tone Timer J Program 24 02 10 30 Only used with Tandem Trunking Disconnect Timer after Warning Tone J Program 25 07 07 600 Only used with DISA J Progra...

Page 839: ...used with the Networking feature both systems must be programmed the same for the Continue Disconnect codes A trunk can be set up to automatically tandem trunk forward to an outside telephone number or Speed Dial System Group Dialing bin Other programmed options for incoming and outgoing calls can affect how calls are handled Refer to Central Office Calls Answering Central Office Calls Placing and...

Page 840: ...d Transfer Calls Select the CODEC gain type used by the trunk when it is part of an Unsupervised Conference 14 01 05 Basic Trunk Data Setup Receive Gain Level for Conference and Transfer Calls Select the CODEC gain type used by the trunk when it is part of an Unsupervised Conference 14 01 13 Basic Trunk Data Setup Loop Supervision For each trunk that should be able to participate in a tandem call ...

Page 841: ...Disconnect Time This timer will start after the Trunk to Trunk warning tone is heard 0 64800 seconds 25 07 07 System Timers for VRS DISA DISA Tandem Trunking Conversation Warning Tone Time Determine the length of time a DISA caller or a Tandem Trunking conversation can talk before the Long Conversation tone is heard 0 64800 seconds 25 07 08 System Timers for VRS DISA DISA Tandem Trunking Long Conv...

Page 842: ...tgoing from trunk Tandem Trunking 0 64800 seconds 24 02 10 System Options for Transfer Trunk to Trunk Transfer Disconnect Time This timer will start after the Trunk to Trunk warning tone is heard 0 64800 seconds 25 07 07 System Timers for VRS DISA DISA Tandem Trunking Long Conversation Warning Tone Time Determine the length of time a DISA caller or any trunk to trunk such as Tandem Trunking conver...

Page 843: ...timer will start when a trunk begins talking with another trunk for example trunk to trunk transfer outgoing from trunk Tandem Trunking 0 64800 seconds 24 02 10 System Options for Transfer Trunk to Trunk Transfer Disconnect Time This timer will start after the Trunk to Trunk warning tone is heard 0 64800 seconds 25 07 07 System Timers for VRS DISA DISA Tandem Trunking Long Conversation Warning Ton...

Page 844: ...rt of an Unsupervised Conference 14 01 13 Basic Trunk Data Setup Loop Disconnect Supervision For each trunk enter 1 to enable loop supervision 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class of Service 1 15 to an extension 20 07 05 Class of Service Options Administrator Level Set Cancel Automatic Trunk to Trunk Forwarding Enable 1 or disable 0 an extension s ability to use the Trunk to Tru...

Page 845: ...low the Continue operation Using the Continue code before the warning tone is heard has no action 20 28 02 System Option Setup Conversation Disconnect Code When Program 14 01 25 is enabled determine the 1 digit code the user should dial 0 9 to immediately disconnect their call Using the Disconnect code before the warning tone is heard will disconnect the call 20 28 03 System Option Setup Conversat...

Page 846: ...ong Conversation tone is heard This program has no affect if Program 25 07 07 is set to 0 80 01 35 Service Tone Setup 1 Second Signal Tone If required adjust the warning tone heard by the user when Program 24 02 07 expires Operation Method A Tandem Trunking from Conference To set up a Tandem Call 1 Place or answer first trunk call 2 Press the Conf key 3 Place or answer second trunk call 4 To set u...

Page 847: ...er key This sets up an Unsupervised Conference with both outside parties The line keys for the trunks light solid red To disconnect the Conference Forced Trunk Disconnect i e Press the line key 3 or the service code set of Forced Trunk Disconnect in 11 10 26 must be used by an extension other than the originating extension Single Line Telephone To set up a Tandem Call 1 Place or answer first trunk...

Page 848: ...code 733 or the service code set for Set Automatic Transfer per Trunk 2 Dial the desired trunk number Trunk Number 001 200 3 Hang up The line key for the trunk will be solid red as long as the Unsupervised Conference continues To disconnect the Conference Forced Trunk Disconnect i e Press the line key or 9 plus the trunk number 3 To cancel Automatic Tandem Trunking 1 Dial service code 734 or the s...

Page 849: ...onnect Code To use the Continue code to extend a Tandem Trunk call 1 An external call connects to an external number either by transferring with Tandem Trunking or by DISA caller 2 After the programmed time Program 24 02 07 a warning tone is heard and the user dials the Continue code Program 20 28 01 to extend the conversation 3 After the programmed time Program 20 28 03 the warning tone is heard ...

Page 850: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 828 Tandem Trunking Unsupervised Conference THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 851: ...lephone system and PC are connected by installing an adapter on the telephone multiline terminal allowing the PC user to access sophisticated communications services via the telephone lines Conditions Caller ID and Call status will be available from the TAPI interface functions Refer to Table 2 25 TAPI Commands for a list of supported TAPI commands Table 2 25 TAPI Commands TAPI Commands lineAddPro...

Page 852: ...unning Windows 98 Second Edition Windows 2000 or Windows XP A TAPI compatible Windows application lineClose lineReleaseUserUserInfo lineDeallocateCall lineRemoveFromConference lineGetAddressID lineSecureCall lineGetAddressStatus lineSendUserUserInfo lineGetCallInfo lineSetupConference lineGetCallStatus lineSetupTransfer lineGetLineDevStatus lineSwapHold lineOpen lineUncompleteCall lineSetAppSpecif...

Page 853: ...n an idle state press the Check key 2 Press the Headset key PGM 15 07 or SC 751 05 twice 3 Press the Clear key to return the display to idle The Headset key blinks when Automatic Headset is activated To cancel Automatic Headset repeat these steps To redirect calls to the headset and disable the hookswitch required for some TAPI features 1 With the multiline terminal in an idle state press the Chec...

Page 854: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 832 TAPI Compatibility THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 855: ...r and busy station The busy station user can place the existing call on hold to answer the Override Conditions One Tone Override at a time can be received at a Multiline Terminal Tone Override can be accomplished only after receiving a BUSY tone Tone Override originate is allowed from a Single Line Telephone until the PBR times out Default Setting None System Availability Terminals All Multiline T...

Page 856: ...Service Second Call for DID DISA DIL E M Enable 1 or disable 0 an extension s ability to receive a second call from a DID DISA DIL or tie line caller 20 09 07 Class of Service Options Incoming Call Service Call Queuing For each extension disable 0 or enable 1 the extensions ability to have multiple calls queued at the extension If Allowed Tone Override is automatic Refer to PRG 20 13 06 20 13 05 C...

Page 857: ...this timer to set the interval between Off Hook Signaling alerts 80 01 39 Service Tone Setup Ring Busy Tone Define Ring Busy Tone Operation To send off hook signals to an extension busy on a call Your extension may send off hook signals automatically 1 Dial PRG11 16 04 OR Dial 709 PRG 11 12 02 OR Press the Off Hook Signaling key PGM 15 07 01 code 33 You hear Ring Busy Tone The called extension hea...

Page 858: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 836 Tone Override THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 859: ... The extension which is totalled is determined by system programming The system outputs this data to the PC for the total period Conditions The SMDR call buffer stores 500 calls The buffer stores calls when the SMDR device is unavailable When the buffer fills the oldest record is deleted to allow the new record to be saved If connected to the output device the reports will print hourly If not conn...

Page 860: ... 1855 84 84 01 58 31 00 04 19 LINE001 79 71 01 05 26 8 Term Definition Terminal Terminal Number Called Party Number maximum 24 digits OTG Outgoing Call Frequency number of outgoing calls maximum 65535 calls Duration Call Duration for an Outgoing Call Cost Call Charge Not Used ICM Incoming Call Frequency number of incoming calls maximum 65535 calls Answer Answer Frequency maximum 65535 calls Durati...

Page 861: ...raffic Report Data Setup Call Traffic Output Determine whether or not the Call Traffic Output should be measured 0 No 1 Yes 90 21 01 Traffic Report Output Define the output port to be used for the traffic reports The reports will print hourly when connected to the output device Output Port 0 No Setting 1 CPUII COM Port 2 CPUII USB Port ...

Page 862: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 840 Traffic Reports THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 863: ...ithout Holding A user presses a busy line key or the same busy CAP key and waits for the call to complete The system automatically sends them the call when the internal caller hangs up Automatic On Hook Transfer Operation With Automatic On Hook Transfer a Transfer goes through as soon as the transferring user hangs up For example extension 104 can answer a trunk press Transfer dial 105 and hang up...

Page 864: ...rom any available telephone To enable this feature the system has a program option Program 11 15 09 Service Code Setup Administrative for Special Access Transfer to Trunk Ring Group Code not assigned at default When a call is transferred using this service code it s transferred to the ring group destination for that incoming trunk For example trunk 2 is in Ring Group 4 When the call is transferred...

Page 865: ...nsion that first becomes available If neither extension becomes free within the Transfer Recall Time the call recalls the transferring extension An existing call can be transferred into a conference call Meet Me Paging Transfer allows the user to page a co worker and have the call automatically transferred when the co worker answers the page When transferring an extension user can press a One Touc...

Page 866: ...rred using this service code it s transferred to the ring group destination for that incoming trunk For example trunk 2 is in Ring Group 4 When the call is transferred using this service code the trunk will ring all extensions programmed for Ring Group 4 or ring the External Paging Group for Ring Group 4 depending on how the system is programmed 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Extension users ...

Page 867: ... enabled 0 a transferred caller hears Music on Hold while their call rings the destination extension If disabled 1 a transferred caller hears ringback while their call rings the destination extension For this option to work with voice mail the transferred call must be an unscreened transfer 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class Of Service 1 15 to extensions 20 11 06 Class of Serv...

Page 868: ... extension s ability to receive a Barge In on a call 20 13 17 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Barge In Tone Display Enable 1 or disable 0 the Barge In Tone If disabled this also turns off the Barge In display at the called extension As this option is for extensions and trunks do not have an option for a Barge In Tone the tone will be sent to the trunks based on the Class of Service ...

Page 869: ...0 seconds This also sets how long a Transferred call waits at an extension forwarded to Voice Mail before routing to the called extension s mailbox 24 02 04 System Options for Transfer Transfer Recall Time Set the Transfer Recall Time 0 64800 seconds An unanswered transferred call recalls to the extension that initially transferred it after this interval This interval also sets how long a transfer...

Page 870: ...or hang up If you do not have Automatic On Hook Transfer you must press Conf Program 15 02 24 1 or your Transfer Programmable Function Key to Transfer the call If your co worker does not want the call press the flashing line key to return to the call Single line telephone users can retrieve the call by pressing hookflash If a call has been transferred and the 500 2500 user has hung up the handset ...

Page 871: ...1 While on a call press the Transfer key and dial service code 624 The display shows Transfer to Conf ICM Dial 2 Enter the extension number of the co worker currently on a Conference call to which the call should be transferred To cancel the transfer press the flashing line key to retrieve the call If an error tone is heard Barge In is not enabled for the extension and the call will not go through...

Page 872: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 850 Transfer THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 873: ...r system has outbound WATS lines OCC lines and DDD lines use Trunk Group Routing to route calls to the WATS lines first There are 100 available Trunk Groups and 100 Routes Conditions DISA Program 25 10 and tie lines Program 34 03 have separate Trunk Group Routing programs The system uses Trunk Group Routing programming Program 14 06 when setting up Ringing Line Preference Use trunk group programmi...

Page 874: ...es Programmable Function Keys Ringing Line Preference Trunk Groups Programming 11 01 01 System Numbering Set up a Service Code for Alternate Trunk Route Access 11 09 01 Trunk Access Code If required change the single digit Trunk Access Code normally 9 If you change this code you must also review the settings in 11 01 for the new code selected 11 09 02 Trunk Access Code Alternate Trunk Route Access...

Page 875: ... Trunk Group Routing is set up in Program 14 06 Trunk Group Routes 1 100 23 03 01 Universal Answer Auto Answer Assign trunk routes set in Program 14 06 to extensions for Universal Answer If the call ringing the paging system is in an extension s assigned route the user can dial the Universal Answer code 0 to pick up the call This program also allows an extension user to automatically answer trunk ...

Page 876: ... Group Route chosen when a user seizes a tie line and dials 9 Set Trunk Group Routing in Program 14 06 If the system has ARS dialing 9 accesses ARS Trunk Group Routes 1 100 Operation To place a call using Trunk Group Routing 1 At the multiline terminal press the Speaker key OR At single line telephone lift the handset 2 Dial 9 3 Dial number OR 1 At the multiline terminal press Trunk Group Routing ...

Page 877: ...runk Groups help you minimize the expense of toll calls For example if your system has outbound WATS lines OCC lines and DDD lines program the trunk group to route to the WATS lines first Conditions Unless a user preselects a trunk Trunk Group programming selects the trunk Speed Dialing uses for trunk calls If a user dials a number that is not programmed in ARS the system can route the call to a t...

Page 878: ...ys Central Office Calls Placing Dial Tone Detection Direct Inward Dialing DID Programmable Function Keys Ring Groups Trunk Group Routing Programming 10 09 01 DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit Setup Allocate the circuits on the CPUII for either DTMF receiving or dial tone detection 11 12 14 Service Code Setup for Service Access If the service code for Trunk Group Access 704 by default is not acceptable ch...

Page 879: ...runk Access Map Setup Assign trunks to Access Maps Trunk Access Maps 1 200 15 06 01 Trunk Access Map for Extensions Assign Access Maps to extensions Trunk Access Maps 1 200 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Assign function keys for trunk group access code 02 group or Call Appearance CAP Keys code 08 CAP Key orbit 0001 9999 or 0000 for auto assign Trunk Groups 1 100 20 02 02 System Options for Mu...

Page 880: ...line telephone press Speaker key OR At the single line telephone lift the handset 2 Dial 704 3 Dial trunk group number 1 9 or 001 100 4 Dial number OR 1 Press the Trunk Group key PGM 15 07 or SC 752 02 group 2 Dial the number To answer an incoming trunk group call 1 Lift the handset 2 Press the flashing Trunk Group key ...

Page 881: ... or trunk group to become free The caller connects to the trunk when the trunk becomes free As with Trunk Queuing the user does not have to manually retry the trunk later Any number of extensions may simultaneously queue or Camp On for the same trunk or trunk group When a trunk becomes free the system connects the extensions in the order that the requests were left Conditions With Automatic Route ...

Page 882: ...his interval 20 01 09 System Options Callback Trunk Queuing Cancel Time Set the Callback Trunk Queuing Cancel Time 0 64800 seconds The system cancels an extension s Callback or Trunk Queuing request after this interval 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class Of Service 1 15 to an extension 20 11 07 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Transfer Without Holding Disable 0 an...

Page 883: ...Queuing calls you back 1 Lift the handset To cancel a Trunk Queueing Camp On request 1 At the multiline terminal press the idle Speaker key OR At the single line telephone lift the handset 2 Dial 770 3 At the multiline terminal press Speaker to hang up OR At the single line telephone hang up ...

Page 884: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 862 Trunk Queuing Camp On THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 885: ...r telephone By managing calls on the PC instead of the telephone View Call Plus lets you communicate more easily with people inside and outside the office Three integrated windows are provided to control telephone calls log all telephone activity and manage data about each call With a click of the mouse you can take a call ask a caller to hold route the call to another extension or send the call t...

Page 886: ...hy Module Feature J Multilingual Support Add Languages only United States English Mexican Spanish and Canadian French are on the drive at default New languages can be added in the field from the support CD Additional languages can be added in the field with an upgrade code Both systems support 1 active language at default Both systems support up to a maximum of 3 active languages Supported Languag...

Page 887: ... to four Fax ports on 12 and 16 port systems The EliteMail CTI LX Lite does not support the Fax Mail feature A database from a DOS based EliteMail CMS FMS VMS VMP cannot be migrated to the Linux based EliteMail CTI LX or EliteMail CTI LX Lite When 5 6 or 7 digit station numbers are used this feature is not available The OS 2 based EliteMail CTI on the CTI U10 board does not support the following f...

Page 888: ...mum Number of Active Languages Supported 3 3 Live Monitor Yes Yes via View Call Plus Fax on Demand No No Fax Server No No Tape backup hardware or procedures No No HTML based Administration Console Yes Yes HTML based Mail Box Manager Yes No Client Based Mail Box Manager No Yes Softkeys Yes Yes Live Record using Softkeys Yes Yes Constant Message Count Yes Yes Caller ID Display Yes Yes Caller ID Call...

Page 889: ...for 8 port installations Desktop PC connected to the Local Area Network LAN Required Software When using View Mail for Microsoft Messaging VMM with Office XP 2002 or Office 2000 you must have at least service pack 3 for Office installed prior to installing VMM Failure to do so requires removing and installing the entire Office software suite again Microsoft Outlook needs Corporate or Workgroup ver...

Page 890: ...TeLANophy applications include ViewMail ViewMail for Microsoft Messaging VMM ViewCall Plus ViewFax These TeLANophy applications work on the following operating systems Windows XP Window 98 Windows NT 4 0 with Service Pack 6a Windows 2000 Related Features Central Office Calls Answering Central Office Calls Placing ...

Page 891: ... flash green 0 or red 1 when a Message Wait indication is flashing By default this option is set to 1 red 15 03 01 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup SLT Signaling Type For each Electra Elite IPK II voice mail extension this option must be set to 0 15 03 03 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup Terminal Type Set all SLIU ports used for Voice Mail as type 1 15 03 09 Single Line Telephone Basic...

Page 892: ... of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Call Forwarding Both Ringing 20 11 05 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Call Forwarding with Follow Me 20 11 12 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Call Forwarding Off Premise It is recommended that these options be set to on 1 for the voice mail COS 20 13 01 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Long Conversation Alarm 20 ...

Page 893: ...ervice Type 0 to each trunk you want to ring into Voice Mail as a normal line 22 04 01 Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment Assign Ring Group 102 for an In Skin External Voice Mail or 103 for a Central Voice Mail as the destination For Either Method 22 04 01 Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment To enable Voice Mail Overflow assign selected extensions to a Ring Group that will ring for unan...

Page 894: ...his timer sets the interval 0 64800 seconds between Voice Mail Conversation Record alerts 80 03 01 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup 80 04 01 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup Use these programs to set the criteria for DTMF dial ring back and busy tones Operation Refer to Digital Voice Mail on page 2 271 for complete telephone operation procedures ...

Page 895: ... to log in or log out of their UCD Department Calling Group A multiline terminal can optionally have a function key programmed for one button log in and log out Enhanced Hunting UCD Department Calling is enhanced with expanded hunting capabilities Hunting sets the conditions under which calls to a UCD Department Group pilot number will cycle through the members of the group The hunting choices are...

Page 896: ...e VRS compact flash the queued caller will hear Please hold on All lines are busy Your call will be answered when a line becomes free The VRS can also transfer calls to UCD Department groups Refer to the Voice Response System VRS on page 2 943 feature for more information on setting up the VRS The system prevents hunting to a UCD Department group extension if it is J Busy on a call J In Do Not Dis...

Page 897: ...n UCD 2 875 Priority Routing Figure 2 10 Uniform Call Distribution UCD Priority Call Routing Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 3 Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 3 Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 3 CALL CALL CALL Telephone on a call Telephone on a call Telephone on a call ...

Page 898: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 876 Uniform Call Distribution UCD Circular Routing Figure 2 11 Uniform Call Distribution UCD Circular Routing CALL 1 CALL 2 CALL 3 CALL 4 ...

Page 899: ...ent Group Pilot Numbers Assign pilot numbers to the Extension Department Groups you set up in Program16 02 01 10 15 07 01 Programming Function Keys Assign a Uniform Call Distribution key 46 so extension users can install or remove themselves from the Uniform Call Distribution Group Additional keys can also be assigned for Department Group features Automatic Transfer 56 immediate calling destinatio...

Page 900: ...partment Group Basic Data Setup Queuing for Department Group Calls To have Department Group calls queue when busy set this entry to 1 0 No Queuing 1 Queuing for a Department Group This program allows entries of 1 32 however the system accepts any entry other than 0 as to allow queuing only for ISDN trunks calls 16 01 09 Department Group Basic Data Setup Department Hunting No Answer Time Set how lo...

Page 901: ... Program 11 07 01 Department Groups 1 64 24 02 05 System Options for Transfer Transfer to Busy Department Group Recall Timer After a trunk is unscreen transferred to a busy Department Group this timer will start If the call is not answered it will recall the originator Determine how long the call should ring before recalling 0 64800 seconds 24 02 08 System Options for Transfer Delayed Transfer Tim...

Page 902: ...ss the Speaker key 2 Dial 650 1 OR Press Uniform Call Distribution Log In key PGM 15 07 or SC 751 46 The key lights while you are logged out To log back in to your UCD Department Calling Group While you log back in Uniform Call Distribution will route calls to your extension 1 Press the Speaker key 2 Dial 650 0 OR Press UCD Department Calling Log In key PGM 15 07 or SC 751 46 The key goes out when...

Page 903: ...annel networking between many separate systems or use multiple networking channels per system for greater network performance Data tables in the system program define the routing for each extension in each network node These tables are easily customized to meet the requirements of each networking configuration Users may place an intercom call or transfer a call to any extension at any location by ...

Page 904: ... or Camp On A maximum of 120 Dial Analysis Tables which allows a maximum of 121 connected systems per Uniform Numbering Network DID Full Digit Conversion can access the Uniform Numbering Network Default Setting None System Availability Terminals All Stations Required Component s TLI 2 U ETU or DTI U ETU Related Features Automatic Route Selection ARS Flexible System Numbering K CCIS IP with IAD K C...

Page 905: ...Set the number of digits to be analyzed by the system for ARS routing 44 02 02 Dial Analysis Table for ARS F Route Access Service Type Select the Service Type 0 No Setting 1 Extension Call 2 ARS F Route Table 3 Dial Extension Analyze Table 44 02 03 Dial Analysis Table for ARS F Route Access Additional Data Enter the additional data required for the service type selected in Program 44 02 02 either ...

Page 906: ...calls 0 500 44 05 06 ARS F Route Table Gain Table Number for Tandem Connections For each ARS F Route table 1 500 assign a priority number 1 4 Select the gain table number to be used for tandem connection 0 500 44 05 07 ARS F Route Table ARS Class of Service For each ARS F Route table 1 500 assign a priority number 1 4 Select the Class of Service to be used for ARS 0 16 An extensions ARS COS is det...

Page 907: ...ber of ports The first four DTI PRI card are assigned as 24 Channel cards the next six are assigned as 16 Channel cards and the 11th one is assigned as an 8 Channel card AP ISA Slot is not used in the IPK II If trying to assign an ETU which would excede the maximum number of ports for the Basic Port Package you will not get an error but it will not let you program the related programs Table 2 26 M...

Page 908: ...in slots S1 S8 in the B64 U20 KSU The system recognizes this ETU as an SLI 8 U ETU This ETU shares the total number of station ports in the system 2 2 Notes 1 4 6 CNF 16 U20 ETU 16 Port Multimedia Conference Unit This Multiline Conference Bridge can support 8 or 16 ports Each 8 port ETU supports one 8 party conference or two 4 party conferences Each 16 port ETU supports one 16 party conference two...

Page 909: ...ice processing section handles the following functions DTMF detection and generation General tone detection FAX CNG tone detection PCM compression for audio recording playback Automatic Gain Control AGC Two USB 1 0 ports for USB keyboard and mouse support One 15 pin VGA Connector for VGA monitor support One DSP8 U10 ETU is required for 8 ports Two DSP8 U10 ETUs are required for 12 or 16 ports 1 1 ...

Page 910: ...one adapter This ETU is installed in slots S1 S8 in the basic or expansion B64 U20 KSU The maximum number depends on other station ETUs installed This ETU shares the total number of extension ports in the system 3 15 Notes 1 6 FMS 2 4 U ETU This 2 or 4 Port Digital Voice Mail System is installed in any interface slot It has eight channels of built in Voice Mail The system recognizes this ETU as a ...

Page 911: ...rument is acceptable between the OPX ETU and the Single Line Telephone This ETU is installed in slots S1 S8 in any B64 U20 KSU and shares the number of station ports in the system 6 22 Note 1 2 6 SLI 4 U ETU This 4 Port Single Line Interface ETU supports four Single Line Telephones and or analog voice mail ports Each ETU provides a built in ringer signal generator RSG and Message Waiting MW LED vo...

Page 912: ...Single Line Telephones This ETU is installed in slots S1 S8 in any B64 U20 KSU The maximum number depends on other station ETUs installed This ETU shares the total number of station ports in the system 12 22 Notes 1 6 SLIB 4 U ETU with SLIE 4 U ETU installed These ETUs are an 8 Port Single Line Interface The SLIE ETU is installed on the SLIB ETU and they support eight Single Line Telephones with b...

Page 913: ... 4 6 VP 4 8 U System ETU This 4 or 8 Port Digital Voice Mail System has ports that support TeLANophy inbound outbound faxing and Hospitality HVM applications It is installed in any interface slot and shares the total number of station ports in the system 1 1 Notes 1 3 4 6 VP 12 16 U Daughter ETU This 12 or 16 Port Digital Voice Mail System and the 4 or 8 port provide a 12 or 16 port Digital Voice ...

Page 914: ...e 7 When the DSPII U10 Unit with an In Mail 2 or 4 port Compact Flash is installed on the CPUII U ETU it uses four ports from the maximum station port capacity Table 2 28 Maximum System Capacities for Trunk Interface ETUs Trunk Interface ETUs Description Maximum Capacities Notes Basic Port Package Expanded Port Package BRT 4 U ETU This 4 Port Basic Rate Interface for 8 trunks provides four channel...

Page 915: ...er of CO PBX lines in the system 14 23 Note 1 COI 8 U ETU This 8 Port CO PBX Line Interface has built in fuses posistors supports eight outside CO PBX lines and provides circuitry for ring detection holding and dialing The outside lines must be Ground Start DTMF trunks This ETU is installed in slots S1 S8 in the basic or expansion B64 U20 KSU The maximum number depends on other trunk ETUs installe...

Page 916: ...nts 14 23 Notes 1 3 COIB 8 U ETU 8 Port CO PBX Line Interface can function the same as the COI 4 or COID 4 ETU to provided a Central Office Interface When set for COID mode Loop Start DTMF trunks and or Caller ID trunks are supported and the ETU supports loop start only When the ETU is set for COI mode loop start or ground start DTMF trunks are supported but Caller ID is not supported Fax CO Branc...

Page 917: ...DS 0 channels This ETU supports K CCIS ANI DNIS trunks and CSU less function on T1 A combination of ground start and loop start signaling can be used on the DTI U40 ETU Dial pulse dialing DTMF Tie Line E M and DID are supported This ETU has 24 built in DTMF detectors Trunks are assigned in groups of four When channels are assigned to ANI Feature Group D is supported Feature Group D incoming MF out...

Page 918: ...ystem having a minimum of eight Electronic Station Interface ESI ports and four Trunk ports Note 2 When 2 port Trunk Interface ETUs are installed the system uses four ports from its maximum port capacity Note 3 With the Electra Elite IPK II Expanded Port Package a maximum of 14 COIB 4 U ETUs can be installed as COID 4 U ETUs Note 4 Refer to the KSU Power Based Calculator Chart Note 5 Firmware 5 0 ...

Page 919: ...Notes 1 2 BSU 6S U20 ETU This Slave 6 Base Station Unit for Wireless DECT has connections for six Base Stations and must be used with the BSU 4M U20 ETU This ETU is installed in the first or second slot to the left of the BSU 4 U20 ETU 2 2 Notes 1 2 CCH 4 U ETU This 4 Channel Common Channel Handler CCH for K CCIS provides four K CCIS routes to coordinate receiving common channel data from a distan...

Page 920: ... MEGACO MG16 For MEgaco Station 2 13 PVA U ETU as K CCIS IP with PVA For K CCIS 2 11 Note 1 Refer to the KSU Power Based Calculator Chart Note 2 A maximum of three BSU 4M 2S 6S DECT Wireless ETUs can be installed Note 3 The IAD 8 U ETU is assigned as a CCISoIP ETU and counts as 8 trunk ports when installed with the IP CCH ETU application loaded Table 2 30 KSU Power Based Calculator Chart Package N...

Page 921: ... U ETU 21 83 ESIB 8 U10 ETU 21 83 ESIB 8 plus ESIE 8 U10 ETU 16 Ports 32 166 OPX 2 U ETU 22 30 SLI 4 U ETU 29 25 SLI 8 U ETU 52 29 SLIB 4 U ETU 30 17 SLIE 4 U ETU 17 12 Voice Mail CMS 2 U10 ETU 62 54 CMS 4 U10 ETU 62 54 FMS 2 U10 ETU 62 54 FMS 4 U10 ETU 62 54 VMS 2 4 U10 ETU 60 57 VMS 8 U10 ETU 64 84 FMS 2 4 U20 ETU 75 97 FMS 8 U20 ETU 100 97 VMS 2 U20 ETU 74 100 Table 2 30 KSU Power Based Calcula...

Page 922: ...MS 4 U40 ETU 55 96 VMS 8 U40 ETU 80 100 FMS 2 U40 ETU 55 68 FMS 4 U40 ETU 55 68 FMS 8 U40 ETU 81 68 VP CTI IVR 8 U10 ETU 155 193 VP CTI IVR 16 U10 ETU 274 193 CTP U10 ETU 120 288 Optional BSU 4M U20 ETU 77 47 BSU 2S U20 ETU 35 26 BSU 6S U20 ETU 47 69 CCH 4 U ETU 50 0 HUB U10 ETU 250 0 VMP U40 ETU 55 96 Total Points XX XXX XXX Table 2 30 KSU Power Based Calculator Chart Continued Package Name Power...

Page 923: ...Availability Terminals N A Required Component s Any ETU Related Features None Programming 10 03 01 ETU Setup Setup and confirm the Basic Configuration data for each ETU 90 34 01 02 Firmware Information Used to view the package name and firmware for each ETU Operation None ...

Page 924: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 902 Universal Slots THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 925: ...rform programming functions Abbreviated Group Dialing and Function Keys are just two features programmable from a station Conditions Multiline Terminals must be idle an off hook and have entered the service code when programming any function Default Setting None System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s None ...

Page 926: ...1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 904 User Programming Ability Related Features Clock Calendar Display Programmable Function Keys One Touch Calling Speed Dial System Group Station Code Restriction Programming None Operation None ...

Page 927: ...sion Up to 256 CAR VE keys are provided Conditions There are 256 available ports Extensions shared between CAR keys and Virtual Extensions The 256 available ports Extensions are assigned on a per extension basis for CAR key mode or VE key mode More than one extension can share a VE key An extension can have more than one VE key assigned Up to 32 incoming calls can be queued to busy VE key You are ...

Page 928: ...umber when the key is pressed the real extension cannot be used 15 02 30 Select Toll Restriction Class VE or Real Extension Assign if the phone will use the Toll Restriction class of the VE 0 or the Real Extension when making outbound calls from the VE 15 07 01 Function Keys Assign Virtual Extension function keys on Multiline telephones code 03 extension number 15 08 01 Incoming Virtual Extension ...

Page 929: ... can program Appearance Function keys using a service code default 752 20 10 08 Class of Service Options Answer Service Auto Off Hook for Virtual Extensions Determine if the extension s Class of Service will answer 1 or not answer 0 when the extension goes off hook 20 13 27 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Busy on Seizing Virtual Extension In the Extensions Class of Service enable 1 ...

Page 930: ...tension 1 Press the Virtual Extension key The operation depends on the setting in PRG 15 02 21 2 Place an intercom call or dial a trunk access code to seize an outside line and place your call To program a Virtual Extension key on a telephone 1 Press the Speaker key 2 Dial 752 3 Press the key you want to program 4 Dial 03 5 Dial the number of the extension you want to appear on the key 6 Press Hol...

Page 931: ...e IPK II Document Revision 1 Virtual Extensions 2 909 9 Dial the mode number in which the key will delay ring 1 Day 1 2 Night 1 3 Midnight 1 4 Rest 1 5 Day 2 6 Night 2 7 Midnight 2 8 Rest 2 10 Press the Speaker key ...

Page 932: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 910 Virtual Extensions THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 933: ...stead of calling back later Forwarding can occur for all calls immediately for unanswered calls or only when the extension is busy When a user transfers a call to an extension forwarded to Voice Mail the call waits for the Delayed Call Forwarding time before routing to the called extension s mailbox This gives the transferring party the option of retrieving the call instead of having it go directl...

Page 934: ...n when connected to a system which has voice mail installed When an extension receives a voice mail the MSG key can be used to check the number of messages in voice mail as well as call the voice mail to listen to the messages If there is no Voice Mail Programmable Function Key defined Program 15 07 01 code 77 the telephone s Message Waiting LED will flash to indicate new messages This option is n...

Page 935: ...r every 10 devices that use them H In heavy traffic sites allocate one DTMF receiver for every five devices that use them 11 07 01 Department Group Pilot Numbers Assign a Department Group pilot number for the Voice Mail 8 digits maximum The extensions are assigned to the group in Program 16 02 01 15 02 26 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup MSG Key Operation Mode Determine whether an extension s ...

Page 936: ...n extension code 78 Optional Assign a Personal Answering Machine Emulation key code 16 Optional Use a Call Redirect key 49 to allow a user to transfer a call to another extension or voice mail without answering the call 16 01 08 Department Group Basic Data Setup Queuing for Department Group Call To have Department Group calls queue when busy set this entry to 1 for an extension or voice mail group...

Page 937: ... be set to off 0 for the voice mail COS 20 13 13 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Continued Dialing Enable Continued Dialing 1 for all extensions that will dial Voice Mail features 24 02 02 System Options for Transfer MOH or Ringback on Transferred Calls Use this option to enable 0 or disable 1 MOH on Transfer If enabled 0 a transferred caller hears Music on Hold while their call rin...

Page 938: ...ail can record a message 1 10 minutes 40 03 02 Message Recording Setup Guidance Message Select a guidance message in case recording is not allowed 0 Fixed 1 Answer Message Mailbox 40 03 03 Message Recording Setup Response Message Determine if a response message is automatically sent out when busy 0 Disable 1 Enable 40 07 01 Voice Prompt Language Assignment for Voice Mail Specify the language to be...

Page 939: ...med Message Notification strings do not contain the code 9 for trunk access When using an external voice mail and centrex transfer this option should be disabled or the service code 3 in Program 11 12 42 will need to be changed 45 01 06 Voice Mail Integration Options Record Alert Tone Interval Time This timer sets the interval 0 64800 seconds between Voice Mail Conversation Record alerts 80 03 01 ...

Page 940: ...ere are both voice mail messages and Message Waiting calls the display indicates the number of new voice mail messages and then each Message Waiting call is shown When there are new messages the Large LED on the telephone will flash red 2 To return a displayed Message Waiting press the Message key a second time press the Speaker key or lift the handset To listen to the voice messages with Voice Me...

Page 941: ...nceling skip to step 4 3 If setting Call Forward dial Voice Mail master number 4 Press Speaker to hang up or hang up at the single line telephone Your Call Forwarding Keys flash when Call Forwarding is activated Transferring Calls to a Mailbox To Transfer your active call to a mailbox Multiline Terminal 1 Press Hold 2 Press Voice Mail key PGM 15 07 or SC 751 code 77 3 Dial number of mailbox to rec...

Page 942: ...f having it picked up by Voice Mail 2 Hang up Recording your Call To record your active call in your mailbox Multiline Terminal 1 Press Voice Mail Record key PGM 15 07 or SC 751 code 78 You hear two beeps and your Record key flashes The beeps periodically repeat to remind you that you are recording To stop recording press the Voice Mail Record key again You can restart and stop recording as requir...

Page 943: ...through your display 3 When you find the message you want to answer press the Speaker key You will either N Go to your Voice Mail mailbox N Listen to the new General Message N Automatically call the extension that left you a Message Waiting If you see You have VOICE MESSAGE n MESSAGES New messages in your Voice Mail mailbox CHECK MESSAGE VRS GENERAL MESSAGE Not listened to the current General Mess...

Page 944: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 922 Voice Mail Integration Analog THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 945: ...en flashing it will call that extension You have to use a VM Message key code 77 to get the indication when there is a new message It can also be used for installed extensions VM Message key will call the VM and log into the mail box If a VM Message key of the extension is placed on the extension the Large LED will not light VM message LED is higher priority then any other status for the DSS BLF k...

Page 946: ...s DSS Consoles The available options are Regular Business Mode 0 Hotel Mode 1 ACD Monitor Mode 2 and Business ACD Mode 3 30 02 01 DSS Console Extension Assignment Designate the DSS Console installations i e the extensions that have DSS Consoles connected to them 30 03 01 DSS Console Key Assignment Customize DSS Console keys to function as DSS keys Service Code keys Programmable Function Keys and O...

Page 947: ...751 3 Press the key you want to program 4 Dial 01 5 Dial the number of the extension you want to appear on the key 6 Press the Hold key 7 Press the Speaker key To program a VM Message key on a telephone 1 Press the Speaker key 2 Dial 751 3 Press the key you want to program 4 Dial 77 5 Dial the number of the extension you want to appear on the key 6 Press the Speaker key ...

Page 948: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 926 Voice Mail Message Indication on Line Keys THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 949: ...iline terminal users and 500 2500 set users can initiate and receive a Voice Over To enable Voice Over a multiline terminal can have a function key programmed for Voice Over In addition to one touch Voice Over operation the key shows the Voice Over status as follows Conditions While active Voice Over uses a Conference circuit on a CPUII U10 ETU Refer to the Conference feature for Conference circui...

Page 950: ... Voice Over at a time A multiline terminal user cannot answer a Voice Over with an internal call on hold An attempt to Voice Over a station can be denied if the station is in DND Do Not Disturb Mode Automatic Redial is activated during Station Programming during Incoming Ringing during Internal External Paging during a Conference Call during a conference call on hold the terminal is on internal ho...

Page 951: ...r code 48 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class of Service 1 15 to an extension 20 13 06 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Automatic off hook Signaling In an extension s Class of Service enter 1 if you want callers to a busy extension to hear busy ring tone Enter 0 if you want callers to hear busy tone The caller must then dial 7 to activate Intercom Off Hook Signali...

Page 952: ...rvice Code must be undefined To respond to a Voice Over alert tone to your extension You can only respond if you have a Voice Over key 1 Press the Voice Over key The Voice Over key lights steadily green and you can talk to the interrupting party You cannot respond by dialing the Voice Over Service Code 6 To return to your original call 1 Press the Voice Over key 2 Press the Voice Over key again Yo...

Page 953: ...ny are received and routed to other parts of the company s intranet local area or wide area network or they can be sent over the Internet using CO lines to another gateway 3 The VoIP supports the following J Trunks IP CCIS H 323 and SIP Trunks Compressions of G 711 G 723 and G 729 J Stations Megaco Compressions of G 711 and G 729 Using LANs Using a LAN setup local area network with the Electra Eli...

Page 954: ... assignment An IP address assigns a unique address for each device There are two types of IP addresses Private and Global A Private IP address is not accessible through the internet a Global IP address can be accessed through the internet With a Private IP address with equipment that does not access the internet directly addresses can be assigned to the equipment within Class A B or C by assigning...

Page 955: ...s defining the network location of the final destination So for example if the IP Address were 172 16 0 10 and the Subnet Mask used was Class B 255 255 0 0 the first two groups of numbers 172 16 would be ignored once they reached the proper network location The next two groups 0 10 would be the final destination within the LAN to which the connection is to be made DHCP DHCP Dynamic Host Configurat...

Page 956: ...729 The result is still a bit stream but with fewer bits per second For example G 729 will reduce the 64 K bits per second to a bit stream of 8 K bits per second This bit stream is then divided into chunks called Voice Samples or Voice Frames that can be placed in packets for transmission over a data network This reduced bit stream is examined repeatedly in fixed time intervals This examination ti...

Page 957: ...phone is connected the next three consecutive station ports available will be assigned as IP ports Switches Hubs for PoE If PoE power over ethernet is to be used to eliminate the separate power adapters due to the power requirements a separate power source is suggested Each IP telephone consumes one port When automatically selected the port number ranges from1 256 Figure 2 12 IP Telephone Configur...

Page 958: ...prevent a lack of resources Default Setting Disabled Related Features None System Availability Terminals ITH 4D 8D 16D 2 3 TEL IP Adapter VLAN VLAN Tag and port based VLAN VoCoder G 711 µ law A law G 729a Jitter Buffer Size Set by System Programming RTP Length Set by System Programming Echo Canceller Tail Size Set by System Programming Level Adjustment Set by System Programming Protocol H 248 IP P...

Page 959: ...the IP address for the MG 16 ETU default slot 1 172 16 0 20 slot 2 172 16 0 21 etc The IP address should be increased according to the number of VoIP MG16 ETUs 84 05 02 Interface Mode Speed For each MG16 ETU enter the Mode speed setting default Auto 84 05 03 Master Slave Setting For each MG16 ETU enter the MASTER Slave setting There can only be one MG16 assigned as MASTER and additional MG16 ETU m...

Page 960: ...P Address 1 On the Electra Elite IPK II IP multiline terminal enter the telephone s program mode by pressing Hold Conf This enters the IP User Menu program mode to select the settings for the individual telephone To enter the telephone s program mode the display must show the time error or Connecting message prior to pressing Hold Conf 2 Press 1 Network Settings 3 Select 1 for DHCP mode If not fla...

Page 961: ... enter the Default Gateway address For on site LANs this is the entry in Program 10 12 03 When telephones are off site remote LAN these settings are dependant on the remote LAN settings not the telephone system settings 6 Access Network Settings and press 4 to enter the Subnet Mask For on site LANs this is the entry in Program 10 12 02 When telephones are off site remote LAN these settings are dep...

Page 962: ...the DHCP server needs to assign a fixed IP address to clients 10 16 01 Option Information Setup Router Set the router address for the DHCP server to the client 10 16 02 Option Information Setup DNS Server If required set the DNS server address for the DHCP server to the client 10 16 05 Option Information Setup MGC Set the MGC IP address for the DHCP server to the client Programming Electra Elite I...

Page 963: ...ready operating with a DHCP server disable the Electra Elite IPK II s DHCP server Either DHCP server can be used but not both When a user s DHCP server is operating make sure to define Program 10 16 Programming Using an External DHCP If a user s LAN is already operating with a DHCP server disable the Electra Elite IPK II s DHCP server Either DHCP server can be used but not both Operation None ...

Page 964: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 942 Voice Over Internet Protocol VoIP THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 965: ...e time date or the extension s number VRS Messages The VRS allows you to record up to 48 VRS messages You allocate these messages for Automated Attendant greetings the General Message ACD messages and the 900 Preamble message The total storage time for all messages is approximately 45 minutes The maximum duration for any type of message is 2 minutes this is not programmable VRS messages are batter...

Page 966: ...s J Single Digit Dialing Single Digit Dialing allows Automated Attendant callers to dial extensions Department Calling Groups and Voice Mail by pressing a single digit For example your Automated Attendant can greet calls with Thank you for calling To place an order dial 1 To check on an existing order dial 2 To speak with an operator dial 0 You can set up single digit dialing for each VRS Message ...

Page 967: ... Music on Hold can be played This feature has two different modes J Permanent Mode This mode sets the feature using system programming and is available for the following types of calls N Normal Incoming Call When the call is not answered or a user presses the VRS Waiting Message function key this feature will be initiated The waiting message will be played until other no answer program transfer to...

Page 968: ...heir outside call to the VRS This lets their caller take advantage of the Automated Attendant s extensive routing capabilities To Transfer the call the user simply places the call on Hold dials the unique VRS service code set up in system programming default 782 and hangs up Voice Prompting Messages The VRS feature provides the system with Voice Prompting Messages These Voice Prompting Messages te...

Page 969: ...t responded 1 11 Your calls have been forwarded An extension user has forwarded their calls 1 12 Vacant number An extension user has dialed an extension that does not exist 1 13 Is unavailable An outside caller dials an extension through the Automated Attendant and the extension is busy 1 14 Please dial a new station 1 15 Or dial 1 16 To wait 1 17 To leave your number 1 18 Dial to call you back at...

Page 970: ... dial 1 29 To leave a message 1 30 Just a moment 1 31 Hello 1 32 Thank you 1 33 Good bye 2 00 Oh A user dials 6 for the extension number or 8 for the time 2 01 Dial 2 02 Star 2 03 Pound 2 04 Zero 2 05 One A user dials 6 for the extension number 8 for the time and date or as part of a spoken code e g 714 2 06 Two 2 07 Three 2 08 Four 2 09 Five 2 10 Six 2 11 Seven 2 12 Eight 2 13 Nine 2 14 Ten 2 15 ...

Page 971: ... 23 Nineteen 2 24 Twenty 2 25 Thirty 2 26 Forty 2 27 Fifty 2 28 Sixty 2 29 Seventy 2 30 Eighty 2 31 Ninety 2 32 Hundred 2 33 Thousand 2 43 Message 2 44 Messages 2 64 January 2 65 February 2 66 March 2 67 April 2 68 May 2 69 June 2 70 July 2 71 August 2 72 September Table 2 32 Voice Prompting Messages Continued Message No Message This message will play when ...

Page 972: ...here are available VRS ports If a 900 calls comes in when all VRS ports are busy the call will not appear on an extension until a VRS port is available You can also use the 900 Preamble message to set up an Auto Answer with Greeting application When a receptionist answers a call the VRS can play a preamble message such as Welcome to ABC Company How can I help you When the caller replies the recept...

Page 973: ...mber the user presses 6 for Number To listen to the time and date the user presses 8 for Time Available with 64 Port Basic CPUII The VRS feature is available with the 64 port Basic CPUII no feature Upgrade PAL chip required Note that the VRS feature requires a DSPII U10 Unit be attached to the CPUII with the optional VRS flash card installed Although the DSPII U10 Unit is recognized for this featu...

Page 974: ...sy Department Group to queue for the next available extension 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class of Service 1 15 to extensions 20 07 13 Class of Service Options Administrator Level VRS Record In an extension s Class of Service enable 1 or disable 0 the extension s ability to record erase and listen to VRS messages 20 07 14 Class of Service Options Administrator Level VRS Gener...

Page 975: ...14 01 VRS Delayed Message for IRG 1st Waiting Message Start Time For each Ring Group set how long the system waits before playing the first message 0 64800 seconds This timer is also used for VRS Waiting Message 22 14 02 VRS Delayed Message for IRG 1st Waiting Message Number For each Ring Group select the message number to be played as the first message 0 48 This program is also used for VRS Waiti...

Page 976: ...used for VRS Waiting Message 22 15 05 VRS Waiting Message for Department Group 2nd Waiting Message Sending Count For each Department Group set the number of times the first message will be played 0 255 This program is also used for VRS Waiting Message 22 15 06 VRS Waiting Message for Department Group Tone Kind at Message Interval For each Department Group determine what the caller will hear betwee...

Page 977: ...le digit dialing for Automated Attendant callers For each VRS Message programmed to answer outside calls see Program 25 02 01 specify the destination reached four digits maximum when the caller dials the single digit code 25 07 02 System Timers for VRS DISA VRS DISA No Answer Time If an Automated Attendant caller dials an extension that does not answer the call will wait this interval before rerou...

Page 978: ...am 40 10 04 and then ring the VRS No Answer Destination Ring Group 40 11 01 Pre Amble Message Assignment For each trunk that should have the 900 Preamble option enter the number of the VRS message 1 48 that is your recorded preamble message Enter 0 for no preamble Related Features Transfer Operation VRS Messages To record a VRS message 1 Press the Speaker key or lift the handset OR At a single lin...

Page 979: ...message press 5 and then enter the message number 01 48 OR Hang up To erase a previously recorded VRS message 1 Press the Speaker key or lift the handset OR At a single line telephone lift the handset 2 Dial 616 3 Dial 3 Erase 4 Dial the number of the VRS message you want to erase 01 48 5 Press the Hold key multiline terminal only to cancel the procedure without erasing and return to step 3 OR Han...

Page 980: ...not lift the handset or press the Speaker key 2 Dial 4 General OR 1 Lift the handset and dial 611 You will hear the General Message Normally your MW LED goes out If it continues to flash you have unanswered Message Waiting requests or new messages in your Voice Mail mailbox To record listen to or erase the General Message 1 Press the Speaker key or lift the handset OR At single line telephone lift...

Page 981: ...er key 2 Dial 6 for extension number To check the system time and date from any multiline terminal extension 1 Do not lift the handset or press the Speaker key 2 Dial 8 for time and date 900 Preamble To answer a 900 Preamble call 1 Answer the ringing call The line key or Call Appearance CAP key turns solid red as the system plays the preamble to the caller 2 When you hear two beeps and the line ke...

Page 982: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 960 Voice Response System VRS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 983: ... display The users should set the volumes for their most comfortable levels Conditions The contrast is not adjustable when the telephone has background music enabled Multiline terminal users can further increase station ring volume by pressing the Speaker key and dialing Code 729 LCD contrast off hook ringing volume station ringing volume and speaker volume adjustments is determined by PRG 15 02 2...

Page 984: ...ained at the user s setting 1 after hanging up the handset This command also controls LCD Contrast Off Hook Ringing Volume Station Ringing Volume and Speaker Volume Operation To adjust the volume of incoming ringing and splash tone 1 If the telephone is idle press the Speaker key and dial 729 If the telephone is ringing skip to Step 2 2 Press VOLUME or VOLUME To adjust the volume of ringing incomi...

Page 985: ...red by the user With the Long Conversation Cutoff feature incoming or outgoing central office calls can also be disconnected Warning Tone for DISA Callers For DISA callers with this feature enabled the warning tone timer begins when an incoming DISA call places an outgoing call and either the inter digit timer expires or the outgoing call is answered If an outside call is transferred to forwarded ...

Page 986: ...aces a trunk call the system sends the first warning tone to their extension after this interval 0 64800 seconds 20 21 02 System Options for Long Conversation Long Conversation Alarm 2 After hearing the first warning tone the system sends additional warning tones after this interval 0 64800 seconds The warning tones continue spaced by this interval until the user hangs up 20 28 01 System Option fo...

Page 987: ...ion Disconnect Determine how long after the Warning Tone is heard the system will wait before disconnecting DISA calls unless the Continue code is entered Program 25 13 02 Related Features Central Office Calls Answering Central Office Calls Placing Direct Inward System Access DISA Intercom Long Conversation Cutoff Single Line Telephones Analog 500 2500 Sets Toll Restriction Operation Warning Tone ...

Page 988: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 966 Warning Tone For Long Conversation THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 989: ...de the following Handset The handset has the following features J Alphanumeric Display with Backlight The backlight can be turned On Off in the profile setup J LED Indication for Incoming and Unanswered Calls J Telephone Book with 65 Number Memory Capacity While idle dial the number to be stored then press and OK Enter the name associated with the number using the dial pad and press OK J Built in ...

Page 990: ... link between the IPK Wireless DECT telephone and the Electra Elite IPK II system Base Stations are connected to the BSU U20 ETU using standard two wire twisted pair telephone cable CAT 4 or CAT 5 The maximum distance from the BSU U20 ETU to the Base Station is 3 280 feet Local power is not required because the Base Station receives power from the IPK II system Up to 16 Base Stations can be connec...

Page 991: ... Base Station can have up to three Repeaters and three Repeaters can be used to form a linear line chain or a non linear line three repeaters can be assigned to one base When IPK Wireless DECT telephone does not respond to an incoming call within 12 seconds because it is out of area the originator hears a busy tone The Out of Area Timer is fixed at 12 seconds Program 20 22 05 The Call Forward Busy...

Page 992: ...onent s BSU 4M U20 ETU Master BSU 2S U20 ETU Slave BSU 6S U20 ETU Slave Base Station BS Tool for Wireless Line ETU Windows Application included with the BSU 4M U20 ETU Related Features None 5 BSU 6S ETU BSU 2S ETU BSU 4M ETU 12 6 BSU 2S ETU BSU 6S ETU BSU 4M ETU 12 7 BSU 6S ETU BSU 6S ETU BSU 4M ETU 16 No Slot N 2 Slot N 1 Slot N No of Base Stations Note ...

Page 993: ...0 22 05 DECT Out of Range Timer 83 12 01 DECT Measurement Length Of Base Stations For Good Hand Off 90 27 01 DECT Wireless System ID 91 06 01 DECT Wireless Subscription New 91 07 01 DECT Wireless Subscription Delete Operation Placing and outside call 1 Press the key on hook off hook 2 Dial 9 3 Dial the outside number Placing and outside call with pre dial 1 Dial 9 2 Press and hold the asterisk key...

Page 994: ...Document Revision 1 Electra Elite IPK II 2 972 Wireless DECT THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 995: ......

Page 996: ...FEATURES AND SPECIFICATIONS MANUAL NEC Unified Solutions Inc Document Revision 1 ...

Reviews:

No comments

Related manuals for ELECTRA ELITE IPK II

Panasonic MICROCOMPUTER MN103S Connection Diagrams preview
MICROCOMPUTER MN103S
Brand: Panasonic Pages: 5
Panasonic MICROCOMPUTER MN103S Application Note preview
MICROCOMPUTER MN103S
Brand: Panasonic Pages: 21
Panasonic FP2 Series Manual preview
FP2 Series
Brand: Panasonic Pages: 56
Panasonic FP2 Series Product Manual preview
FP2 Series
Brand: Panasonic Pages: 28
Panasonic KX-HTS Series Quick Start Manual preview
KX-HTS Series
Brand: Panasonic Pages: 2
Panasonic WJMPU955 - PROCESSING UNIT - TMU Operating Instructions Manual preview
WJMPU955 - PROCESSING UNIT - TMU
Brand: Panasonic Pages: 62
Jetter JXM-IO-E30 Installation Manual preview
JXM-IO-E30
Brand: Jetter Pages: 35
Laurell WS-650 lite Series Operation Manual preview
WS-650 lite Series
Brand: Laurell Pages: 84
AlphaShield INTERNET PRIVACY PROTECTION (Spanish) Manual Del Usuario preview
INTERNET PRIVACY PROTECTION
Brand: AlphaShield Pages: 49
iWave iW-RainboW-G30D Hardware User'S Manual preview
iW-RainboW-G30D
Brand: iWave Pages: 89
Genie WONVR216P5 Quick Start Manual preview
WONVR216P5
Brand: Genie Pages: 15
Renesas Compact Emulator M30620T-CPE User Manual preview
Compact Emulator M30620T-CPE
Brand: Renesas Pages: 52
Neo Instruments Mini Vent User Manual preview
Mini Vent
Brand: Neo Instruments Pages: 2
Analog Devices EZ-Extender Analog 120-Pin Probing Board Manual preview
EZ-Extender Analog 120-Pin Probing Board
Brand: Analog Devices Pages: 29
Orolia Seven Solutions WR-ZEN Series User Manual preview
Seven Solutions WR-ZEN Series
Brand: Orolia Pages: 167
Cypress Semiconductor CY7C68033 Specification Sheet preview
CY7C68033
Brand: Cypress Semiconductor Pages: 33
Trend Micro IPS Pro-Module-24C-GE-BP-TM Quick Setup Manual preview
IPS Pro-Module-24C-GE-BP-TM
Brand: Trend Micro Pages: 3
Rainbow QPBB Instruction Manual preview
QPBB
Brand: Rainbow Pages: 2

Brands by name

Popular brands

Load more brands